01.02.2015 Views

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 JULY 2010 - Career Point

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 JULY 2010 - Career Point

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 JULY 2010 - Career Point

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 1 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Teachers open the door. You enter by yourself<br />

Volume - 6 Issue - 1<br />

July, <strong>2010</strong> (Monthly Magazine)<br />

Editorial / Mailing Office :<br />

112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.) 324009<br />

Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000<br />

e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com<br />

Editor :<br />

Pramod Maheshwari<br />

[B.Tech. <strong>IIT</strong>-Delhi]<br />

Cover Design<br />

Om Gocher, Govind Saini<br />

Layout<br />

Rajaram Gocher<br />

Circulation & Advertisement<br />

Ankesh Jain, Praveen Chandna<br />

Ph (0744)- 3040000, 9001799502<br />

Subscription<br />

Sudha Jaisingh Ph. 0744-2500492, 2500692<br />

© Strictly reserved with the publishers<br />

• No Portion of the magazine can be<br />

published/ reproduced without the written<br />

permission of the publisher<br />

• All disputes are subject to the exclusive<br />

jurisdiction of the Kota Courts only.<br />

Every ef<strong>for</strong>t has been made to avoid errors or<br />

omission in this publication. In spite of this, errors<br />

are possible. Any mistake, error or discrepancy<br />

noted may be brought to our notice which shall be<br />

taken care of in the <strong>for</strong>thcoming edition, hence any<br />

suggestion is welcome. It is notified that neither the<br />

publisher nor the author or seller will be<br />

responsible <strong>for</strong> any damage or loss of action to any<br />

one, of any kind, in any manner, there from.<br />

Unit Price Rs. 20/-<br />

Special Subscription Rates<br />

6 issues : Rs. 100 /- [One issue free ]<br />

12 issues : Rs. 200 /- [Two issues free]<br />

24 issues : Rs. 400 /- [Four issues free]<br />

Owned & Published by Pramod Maheshwari,<br />

112, Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota & Printed<br />

by Naval Maheshwari, Published & Printed at<br />

112, Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.<br />

Editor : Pramod Maheshwari<br />

Dear Students,<br />

Is examination a common cause of stress<br />

In most Asian cultures, the great emphasis on academic achievement and high<br />

expectations of success make it especially stressful <strong>for</strong> students. The strong<br />

negative stigma attached to failure also adds to the pressure.<br />

Like it or not, we have to accept that examinations are necessary in any<br />

educational system. Even though it is debatable whether they are accurate<br />

measures of actual ability, no better alternatives have been proposed.<br />

Examinations remain necessary to motivate students’ learning, measure their<br />

progress and ultimately, serve as evidence of attainment of certain skills,<br />

standards or qualifications.<br />

Success at examinations provides opportunities to proceed with higher<br />

education and improves employment prospects, underlining their importance.<br />

No matter how well prepared, many factors may influence one’s per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />

at the time of the examination and there is seemingly, no definite guarantee of<br />

success. Essentially, it is this vital importance attached to success at<br />

examinations coupled with the element of uncertainty that makes them so<br />

stressful.<br />

As with other sources of stress, the stress of examinations is not all bad. It is a<br />

strong incentive <strong>for</strong> students to study and poses a challenge <strong>for</strong> individual<br />

achievement. However, when stress becomes excessive, per<strong>for</strong>mance begins<br />

to suffer. There is thus a need to control levels of stress be<strong>for</strong>e it becomes<br />

overwhelming and detrimental. Reliase of stress is necessary <strong>for</strong> optimum<br />

per<strong>for</strong>mance, the means of which is relasing.<br />

Learn to relax<br />

The stress responses produces muscle tension, which you would commonly<br />

experience as backache, neck ache or tension headache at the end of the day.<br />

Often this is unconscious. So to relax these muscles, you need to consciously<br />

practice relaxation exercises. These could involve muscle relaxation, deep<br />

breathing exercises, body massage or guided imagery. Like any particular skill,<br />

you need to practice them regularly in order to reap the benefits.<br />

Another way to relax is to maintain a quiet time as part of the daily routine.<br />

Quiet time refers to a time <strong>for</strong> you with no interruption from external sources<br />

or distractions. This is a time where you may choose to just think of nothing<br />

and relax. Finally, you can always take up a hobby to help you relax. Do<br />

something you enjoy, be it listening to music.<br />

Ideally, the drive to study should be internally driven by a desire to achieve<br />

one’s own personal goals. Instead, many are driven more by the fear of failure,<br />

which is more stress-provoking and leads easily to discouragement.<br />

Attending school should not merely revolve around preparation <strong>for</strong><br />

examinations. Interacting with teachers, socializing with friends, participating in<br />

sports or other extra-curricular activities are all valuable aspects of a ‘wellrounded’<br />

education.<br />

Instead of wishing things would get easier, start looking at how you can get<br />

better...<br />

Yours truly<br />

Pramod Maheshwari,<br />

B.Tech., <strong>IIT</strong> Delhi<br />

Editorial<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 1 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Volume-6 Issue-1<br />

July, <strong>2010</strong> (Monthly Magazine)<br />

NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS<br />

Much more <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> News.<br />

INDEX<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Regulars ..........<br />

PAGE<br />

Know <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> With 15 Best Questions of <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Challenging Problems in Physics,, Chemistry & Maths<br />

Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>.<br />

Xtra Edge Test Series <strong>for</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>- 2011 & 2012<br />

S<br />

Success Tips <strong>for</strong> the Months<br />

• If you don’t notice when you win, you will<br />

only notice when you lose.<br />

• It’s not bragging if you can do it.<br />

• Feel the power of yet. As in “I don't know<br />

how to do this yet.”<br />

• The difficult we do immediately.<br />

impossible takes a bit longer.<br />

The<br />

• Some look down the rapids and see the<br />

rocks. Hunters look down the rapids and<br />

see the flow around the rocks.<br />

• To know what you are doing is an<br />

advantage. To look like you know what<br />

you are doing is essential.<br />

• First law of expertise: Never ask a barber<br />

if you need a haircut.<br />

• If you think you can, you are probably<br />

right. If you think you can't, you are<br />

certainly right.<br />

• Don't do modesty unless you have earned<br />

it.<br />

NEWS ARTICLE 4<br />

Are Nanoparticles health hazard<br />

Nano is the new black<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>ian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 6<br />

Ms. Padmasree Warrior & Dr. Krishan K. Sabnani<br />

KNOW <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 7<br />

Previous <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Question<br />

Study Time........<br />

DYNAMIC PHYSICS 14<br />

8-Challenging Problems [Set# 3]<br />

Students’ Forum<br />

Physics Fundamentals<br />

Capacitor - 1<br />

Friction<br />

CATALYSE CHEMISTRY 29<br />

XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 52<br />

Class XII – <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011 Paper<br />

Class XI – <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2012 Paper<br />

Key Concept<br />

Reaction Mechanism<br />

Energetics<br />

Understanding : Organic Chemistry<br />

DICEY MATHS 42<br />

Mathematical Challenges<br />

Students’ Forum<br />

Key Concept<br />

3-Dimensional Geometry<br />

Progression & Mathematical Induction<br />

Test Time ..........<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 3 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Are Nanoparticles a<br />

Health Hazard<br />

Nanoparticles are a mega business<br />

opportunity <strong>for</strong> multinationals but<br />

they may pose a health hazard to<br />

users<br />

There is a new industrial<br />

revolution taking place all around<br />

us. The only problem is we can’t<br />

see it. The building blocks, being<br />

developed at the cost of billions of<br />

dollars by scientists, governments<br />

and multinational corporations, are<br />

just a few atoms or molecules<br />

thick — nanoparticles. Many are<br />

less than 100 nanometres (nm) —<br />

one-billionth of a metre — thick. A<br />

single human red blood cell in<br />

comparison is around 500 nm in<br />

diametre. It’s a pity though that<br />

our eyesight isn’t good enough at<br />

nanometre level, <strong>for</strong> if it were, we<br />

would see that nanoparticles of<br />

precious metals like gold, silver and<br />

titanium have already made the<br />

jump from research labs to our<br />

homes. Manufactured nanoparticles<br />

are today present in thousands of<br />

consumer products around the<br />

world — silver in washing<br />

machines and water purifiers to kill<br />

bacteria, zinc in cosmetics to<br />

protect against ultraviolet rays,<br />

carbon nano-tubes in tennis<br />

rackets to make them stronger and<br />

lighter, titanium in household<br />

paints to decompose dust and<br />

grime without human intervention.<br />

Nano is the New Black<br />

“There’s Plenty of Room at the<br />

Bottom” So went the classic<br />

lecture by the Nobel prize-winning<br />

physicist Richard Feynman in 1959<br />

that many nano-ficionados now<br />

consider the conceptual sun of the<br />

nanotechnology universe. “Why<br />

cannot we write the entire 24<br />

volumes of the Encyclopedia<br />

Britannica on the head of a pin”<br />

he asked.<br />

“Because there isn’t much of a<br />

point, or money, in doing so!” is<br />

the answer he would have got<br />

today from nanotechnology<br />

researchers. Instead their time is<br />

mostly spent figuring out newer<br />

properties <strong>for</strong> nanoparticles which<br />

can then be embedded into<br />

commercial applications.<br />

Nanoparticles are highly reactive<br />

and prone to unusual properties.<br />

Describing gold, a metal that is<br />

normally inert to all other<br />

chemicals, Prof. C.N.R Rao,<br />

Honorary President and Linus<br />

Pauling Professor at the Jawaharlal<br />

Nehru Centre <strong>for</strong> Advanced<br />

Scientific Research (JNCASR) and<br />

the head of its Nanoscience centre,<br />

says “At 200-300 nm thickness,<br />

gold is not metallic, it does not<br />

shine — in fact it is not gold. And<br />

at 1.5-2 nm, it reacts like mad!”<br />

Gold that is not gold when shrunk<br />

to nanometer size might sound like<br />

an absurdity to many, but it’s<br />

exactly this change in physical<br />

properties that make nanoparticles<br />

popular.<br />

For example zinc oxide (ZnO) and<br />

titanium dioxide (TiO2) have been<br />

used as active ingredients in<br />

sunscreens <strong>for</strong> decades because of<br />

their ability to absorb ultraviolet<br />

rays and reflect back much of the<br />

other remaining sunlight. But they<br />

are both white — the reason many<br />

sunscreens leave a white residue<br />

on the face. When shrunk to<br />

nanometre size however, they<br />

become transparent without losing<br />

their light reflecting or absorbing<br />

abilities.<br />

Silver, an ornamental metal and a<br />

powerful bactericide, can be<br />

reduced to nanoparticle <strong>for</strong>m to<br />

destroy disease-causing bacteria<br />

from all kinds of places — kitchen<br />

counters, contaminated water,<br />

dirty clothes and stinky underarms.<br />

Samsung claims its Silver Nano<br />

range of washing machines release<br />

hundreds of billions of silver nanoions<br />

with each wash to kill over 99<br />

percent of the bacteria found in<br />

dirty clothes, while the same<br />

technology when lined on the<br />

doors of their refrigerators kill<br />

bacteria that could spoil stored<br />

food. Eureka Forbes’ water<br />

purifiers use nanosilver-coated<br />

filters, developed by Prof. Pradeep,<br />

head of <strong>IIT</strong>-Madras’ Nanoscience<br />

department, to destroy harmful<br />

bacteria from drinking water.<br />

Swach, the mass-market water<br />

filter introduced by the Tata<br />

Group, also uses nanosilver<br />

(coated on rice husk particles) to<br />

purify drinking water. During the<br />

last flu pandemic threat authorities<br />

in Hong-Kong sprayed subways<br />

with nanosilver to disinfect them.<br />

L’Oreal, the world’s largest<br />

cosmetics company, reportedly<br />

spends over $600 million each year<br />

researching and patenting<br />

nanoparticles. The head of its<br />

nanotechnology unit also sits on<br />

the management board.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 4 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


There<strong>for</strong>e a metal that is a poor<br />

second cousin to gold in a world<br />

where we value yellow over white,<br />

is the undisputed metal of choice in<br />

the nanoparticle world. In fact,<br />

silver is more popular than any<br />

other material, according to the<br />

database of consumer products<br />

using nanoparticles maintained by<br />

the Woodrow Wilson<br />

International Center <strong>for</strong> Scholars.<br />

Obama admn<br />

nominates <strong>IIT</strong> alumnus<br />

<strong>for</strong> post of NSF Director<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> Madras alumnus Subra Suresh,<br />

popularly known as 'Bakthi Suresh'<br />

during his student days, has been<br />

nominated <strong>for</strong> the post of director<br />

of the National Science Foundation<br />

(NSF) by the Barrack Obama<br />

administration. An official relese<br />

from <strong>IIT</strong> Madras Alumni<br />

Association here said ''when<br />

confirmed by the Senate, Mr<br />

Suresh will become one of the<br />

highest ranking Indian-Americans<br />

ever to serve in an administration.''<br />

An Indian-American technocrat,<br />

53-year-old Subra Suresh<br />

completed his B.Tech Mechanical<br />

Engineering in 1977. Currently the<br />

dean of the MIT engineering<br />

school, he received the<br />

distinguished alumnus award in<br />

1997. In a statement, President<br />

Obama said ''I am proud that such<br />

experienced and committed<br />

individuals have agreed to take on<br />

these important roles in my<br />

administration. I look <strong>for</strong>ward to<br />

working with them in the coming<br />

months and years.'' The National<br />

Science Foundation is the funding<br />

source <strong>for</strong> nearly 20 per cent of all<br />

federally supported basic research<br />

and was an independent federal<br />

agency created by US Congress in<br />

1950. Subra Suresh has been<br />

elected to the US National<br />

Academy of Engineering, the Indian<br />

National Academy of Engineering,<br />

the American Academy of Arts and<br />

Sciences, the Indian Academy of<br />

Sciences in Bangalore, the German<br />

National Academy of Sciences, the<br />

Royal Spanish Academy of Sciences<br />

and the Academy of Sciences of<br />

the Developing World based in<br />

Trieste, Italy.<br />

Major decision regarding<br />

Ganga at <strong>IIT</strong>-K<br />

KANPUR: A collaboration<br />

between the consortium of seven<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>s (<strong>IIT</strong>-Kanpur, Madras, Bombay,<br />

Delhi, Kharagpur, Guwahati and<br />

Roorkee) and Ministry of<br />

Environment and Forest,<br />

Government of India, is being<br />

worked out <strong>for</strong> the purpose of<br />

cleaning the national river Ganga.<br />

The two are expected to sign an<br />

important memorandum of<br />

understanding (MoU) in this regard<br />

during Prime Minister Manmohan<br />

Singh's visit to the Indian Institute<br />

of Technology-Kanpur. Singh is<br />

scheduled to visit <strong>IIT</strong>-K on July 3 to<br />

take part in its convocation<br />

ceremony.<br />

It will be worth mentioning here<br />

that the Central government aims<br />

at meeting the <strong>for</strong>midable<br />

challenge of cleaning the Ganga.<br />

With this goal in mind, it had<br />

launched a new initiative and<br />

established the National Ganga<br />

River Basin Authority (NGRBA)<br />

last year. The Prime Minister, who<br />

is the Chairman of the NGRBA,<br />

asked the Ministry of Environment<br />

and Forest to involve <strong>IIT</strong>s in the<br />

mega project. A joint meeting of all<br />

the seven <strong>IIT</strong>s was convened on<br />

March 12, <strong>2010</strong> in which <strong>IIT</strong>-<br />

Kanpur was represented by Prof<br />

Vinod Tare, also the convener of<br />

the mission. It is <strong>for</strong> the very first<br />

time that the Central government<br />

has involved the seven <strong>IIT</strong>s<br />

together in one single project of<br />

such a large magnitude<br />

Prof Tare further in<strong>for</strong>med TOI<br />

that the 'zero discharge' of both<br />

treated and untreated sewage<br />

waste into the river had been<br />

proposed to the government<br />

under which the waste would not<br />

be allowed into the Ganga.<br />

"We will be doing this mega<br />

project in phases. The first phase<br />

will come to an end in 18 months<br />

wherein the concept of 'zero<br />

discharge' will be put into<br />

application. We also plan to apply<br />

the 'zero discharge' <strong>for</strong>mula in four<br />

cities initially, viz. Hardwar,<br />

Rishikesh, Kanpur and Allahabad. If<br />

we are able to do so in these four<br />

cities, water of the river will<br />

become clean up to Allahabad and<br />

a major work will come to an end<br />

in the first phase."<br />

Meanwhile, Prof SG Dhande,<br />

director, <strong>IIT</strong>-Kanpur, and Prof<br />

Vinod Tare from <strong>IIT</strong>-Kanpur, Prof<br />

Devang Khakhar, director, <strong>IIT</strong>-<br />

Bombay, took part in a meeting<br />

with the officials of the Ministry of<br />

Environment and Forest in New<br />

Delhi on May 19 and discussed all<br />

important aspects of the mega<br />

project. On the occasion, the team<br />

also handed over a set of proposals<br />

to the officials of the ministry. "A<br />

detailed project report will be<br />

given later as several social, legal<br />

aspects will have to be examined,"<br />

said Prof Tare.<br />

The consortium of the seven <strong>IIT</strong>s<br />

have been sanctioned Rs 16 crore<br />

by the government <strong>for</strong> <strong>for</strong>mulating<br />

a proper plan of action <strong>for</strong> the<br />

purpose of cleaning the Ganga. The<br />

authority <strong>for</strong>med by the Central<br />

government has both regulatory<br />

and developmental functions. The<br />

authority will take measures <strong>for</strong><br />

effective abatement of pollution<br />

and conservation of the Ganga in<br />

keeping with sustainable development<br />

needs.<br />

Science Research : Conventional solar cell efficiency could be increased from the current limit of 30 percent to more than 60<br />

percent, suggests new research on semiconductor nanocrystals, or quantum dots, led by chemist Xiaoyang Zhu at The University<br />

of Texas at Austin.<br />

The scientists have discovered a method to capture the higher energy sunlight that is lost as heat in conventional solar cells.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 5 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Success Story<br />

This articles contains stories of person who have succeed after graduation from different <strong>IIT</strong>'s<br />

Ms. Padmasree Warrior<br />

B.Tech, <strong>IIT</strong> Madras<br />

Dr. Krishan K. Sabnani<br />

B.Tech, <strong>IIT</strong> – Kanpur<br />

Padmasree Warrior is senior vice president and chief<br />

technology officer <strong>for</strong> Motorola, with responsibility <strong>for</strong><br />

Motorola Labs, the global software group and emerging<br />

early-stage businesses. Warrior's operational<br />

responsibilities include leading a global team of 4,600<br />

technologists, prioritizing technology programs, creating<br />

value from intellectual property, guiding creative research<br />

from innovation through early-stage commercialization,<br />

and influencing standards and roadmaps. She also serves<br />

as a technology advisor to the office of the chairman and<br />

to the board's technology and design steering committee.<br />

Be<strong>for</strong>e assuming her current position in January 2003,<br />

Warrior was corporate vice president and general<br />

manager of Motorola's energy systems group, where she<br />

was responsible <strong>for</strong> profit and loss, sales, marketing,<br />

engineering and manufacturing. She also was general<br />

manager of Thought beam, Inc., a wholly owned<br />

subsidiary of Motorola, where she led the<br />

commercialization evaluation team related to compound<br />

semiconductor materials research.<br />

Prior to these assignments, Warrior was corporate vice<br />

president and chief technology officer <strong>for</strong> Motorola's<br />

Semiconductor Products Sector (SPS).<br />

A Motorola since 1984, she has been instrumental in<br />

driving innovative methods <strong>for</strong> technology<br />

commercialization realizing early "time to revenue" <strong>for</strong><br />

the corporation. She has held many leadership positions<br />

within Motorola, was appointed vice president in 1999<br />

and was elected a corporate officer in 2000.<br />

Warrior received a M.S. degree in chemical engineering<br />

from Cornell University, and a B.S. degree in chemical<br />

engineering from the Indian Institute of Technology (<strong>IIT</strong>)<br />

in New Delhi, India.<br />

Warrior served on the Texas Governor's Council <strong>for</strong><br />

Digital Economy, and is a member of the Texas Higher<br />

Education Board review panel. She was one of six women<br />

nationwide selected to receive the "Women Elevating<br />

Science and Technology" award from Working Woman<br />

magazine in 2001. She also is a director of Ferro<br />

Corporation.<br />

Krishan Sabnani is Senior Vice President of the<br />

Networking Research Laboratory at Bell Labs in New<br />

Jersey. For the past 23 years Krishan has been a member<br />

of Bell Labs Research. Krishan has conceived and launched<br />

several systems projects in the areas of Internetworking<br />

and wireless networking, led successful transfers of<br />

research ideas to products in Lucent and AT&T business<br />

units and conducted extensive personal research in data<br />

and wireless networking. He has built organizations<br />

known <strong>for</strong> technical excellence by recruiting and coaching<br />

the best people in the industry.<br />

Krishan has received the 2005 IEEE Eric E. Sumner Award<br />

and the 2005 IEEE W. Wallace McDowell Award - the<br />

only person ever to receive both awards. Krishan is a Bell<br />

Labs Fellow. He is also a fellow of the Institute of<br />

Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) and the<br />

Association of Computing Machinery (ACM). He received<br />

the Leonard G. Abraham Prize Paper Award from the<br />

IEEE Communications Society in 1991. Krishan will<br />

receive the 2005 Distinguished Alumni Award from Indian<br />

Institute of Technology (<strong>IIT</strong>), New Delhi, India. He has<br />

also won the 2005 Thomas Alva Edison Patent Award<br />

from the R&D Council of New Jersey. He holds 37<br />

patents and has published more than 70 papers.<br />

In his personal research, Krishan has made major<br />

contributions to the communications protocols area. He<br />

has designed several protocols such as SNR, RMTP, and<br />

Airmail. He has also made significant contributions to<br />

con<strong>for</strong>mance test generation, protocol validation,<br />

automated converter generation, and reverse engineering.<br />

Krishan received his Ph.D. in electrical engineering from<br />

Columbia University, New York, in 1981. He joined Bell<br />

Labs in 1981.<br />

Key Awards and Honors<br />

1. 2005 IEEE Eric E. Sumner Award, received <strong>for</strong><br />

seminal contributions to networking protocols<br />

2. 2005 IEEE Computer Society W. Wallace McDowell<br />

Award<br />

3. 2005 <strong>IIT</strong> Delhi Outstanding Alumni Award<br />

4. 2005 Thomas Alva Edison Patent Award<br />

5. 1991 Leonard G. Abraham Prize Paper Award<br />

6. 1997 Bell Labs Fellow.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 6 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


KNOW <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

By Previous Exam Questions<br />

PHYSICS<br />

1. Masses M 1 , M 2 and M 3 are connected by strings of<br />

negligible mass which pass over massless and friction<br />

less pulleys P 1 and P 2 as shown in fig. The masses<br />

move such the portion of the string between P 1 and P 2<br />

in parallel to the inclined plane and the portion of the<br />

string between P 2 and M 3 is horizontal. The masses<br />

M 2 and M 3 are 4.0 kg each and the coefficient of<br />

kinetic friction between the masses and the surfaces<br />

is 0.25. The inclined plane makes an angle of 37º<br />

with the horizontal.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1981]<br />

P 1<br />

M 1<br />

M 2<br />

P 2 M 3<br />

37º<br />

If the mass M 1 moves downwards with a uni<strong>for</strong>m<br />

velocity, find<br />

(a) the mass of M 1<br />

(b) The tension in the horizontal portion of the string<br />

(g = 9.8 m/sec 2 , sin 37º ≈ 3/5)<br />

Sol. (a) Applying Fnet = ma on M 1 we get<br />

T – m 1 . g = M 1 × 0 = 0 ⇒ T = M 1 g ...(i)<br />

Applying Fnet = Ma on M 2 we get<br />

T – (T´ + M 2 g sin θ – f) = M 2 × a<br />

T = T´ + M 2 g sin θ + f = T´ + M 2 g sin θ + µN<br />

[Q f = µN = µM 2 g cos θ]<br />

∴ T = T´ + M 2 g sin θ + µM 2 g cos θ ...(ii)<br />

P<br />

V<br />

1<br />

T M 2<br />

M<br />

T´ P 2<br />

1<br />

T<br />

V<br />

θ M 2gsinθ N<br />

M<br />

T´<br />

2gcosθ<br />

M 1g<br />

M<br />

f 2g θ<br />

M 3g<br />

Applying F net = Ma <strong>for</strong> M 3 we get<br />

T´ – f ´ = M 3 × 0<br />

⇒ T´ = f ´ = µN´ = µM 3 g<br />

...(iii)<br />

Putting the value of T and T´ from (i) and (iii) in (ii)<br />

we get<br />

M 1 g = µM 3 g + M 2 g sin θ – µ M 2 g cos θ<br />

M 1 = 0.25 × 4 + 4 × sin 37º + 0.25 × 4 × cos 37º<br />

= 4.2 kg<br />

(b) The tension in the horizontal string will be<br />

T ´ = µM 3 g = 0.25 × 4 × 9.8 = 9.8 N<br />

2. A 0.5 kg block slides from the point A (see fig.) on a<br />

horizontal track with an initial speed of 3 m/s towards<br />

a weightless horizontal spring of length 1 m and <strong>for</strong>ce<br />

constant 2 Newton/m. The part AB of the track is<br />

frictionless and the part BC has the coefficients of<br />

static and kinetic friction as 0.22 and 0.2 respectively.<br />

If the distances AB and BD are 2m and 2.14 m<br />

respectively, find the total distance through which the<br />

block moves be<strong>for</strong>e it comes to rest completely.<br />

(Take g = 10 m/s 2 )<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1983]<br />

A B D C<br />

Sol. K.E. of block = work against friction + P.E. of spring<br />

1 mv 2 1<br />

= µ k mg (2.14 + x) + kx<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 × 0.5 × 3 2 1<br />

= 0.2 × 0.5 × 9.8(2.14 + x) + 2 × x<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2.14+ x + x 2 = 2.25<br />

∴ x 2 + x – 0.11 = 0<br />

11<br />

On solving we get x = – 10<br />

1<br />

or x = = 0.1 (valid answer)<br />

10<br />

Here the body stops momentarily.<br />

Restoring <strong>for</strong>ce at y = kx = 2 × 0.1 = 0.2 N<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce at<br />

y = µ s mg × x = 0.22 × 0.5 × 9.8 = 1.078 N<br />

Since friction <strong>for</strong>ce > Restoring <strong>for</strong>ce the body will<br />

stop here.<br />

∴ The total distance travelled<br />

= AB + BD + DY = 2 + 2.14 + 0.1 = 4.24 m.<br />

A B D C Rough L<br />

2m<br />

2.14m<br />

x<br />

Y<br />

3. A small sphere rolls down without slipping from the<br />

top of a track in a vertical plane. The track in a<br />

vertical plane. The track has an elevated section and a<br />

horizontal part, The horizontal part is 1.0 meter<br />

above the ground level and the top of the track is 2.4<br />

metres above the ground. Find the distance on the<br />

ground with respect to the point B(which is vertically<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 7 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


elow the end of the track as shown in fig.) where the<br />

sphere lands. During its flight as a projectile, does the<br />

sphere continue to rotate about its centers of mass <br />

Explain.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1987]<br />

speed of 0.001 ms –1 . Calculate the current drawn<br />

from the battery during the process. (Dielectric<br />

constant of oil = 11, ε 0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 C 2 N –1 m –1 )<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1994]<br />

Sol. The adjacent figure is a case of parallel plate<br />

capacitor. The combined capacitance will be<br />

v<br />

2.4 m<br />

A<br />

1.0m<br />

+<br />

B<br />

Sol. Applying law of conservation of energy at point D<br />

and point A<br />

P.E. at D = P.E. at A + (K.E.) T + (K.E.) R<br />

(K.E.) T = Translational K.E.<br />

mg (2.4) = mg (1) + 2<br />

1 mv 2 + 2<br />

1 Iω<br />

2<br />

(K.E.) R = Rotational K.E.<br />

Since the case is of rolling without slipping<br />

D<br />

2.4m<br />

∴ v = rω<br />

A<br />

1m<br />

B C<br />

∴ ω = r<br />

v where r is the radius of the sphere Also<br />

I = 5<br />

2 mr<br />

2<br />

1<br />

∴ mg(2.4) = mg(1) + mv 2 1 2<br />

+ × mr 2 v<br />

×<br />

2 2 5<br />

2<br />

r<br />

⇒ v = 4.43 m/s<br />

After point A, the body takes a parabolic path. The<br />

vertical motion parameters of parabolic motion will<br />

be<br />

u y = 0 S = ut + 2<br />

1 at<br />

2<br />

S y = 1m<br />

2<br />

1 = 4.9 t y<br />

a y = 9.8 m/s 2<br />

∴ t y = t y =<br />

1<br />

4.9<br />

= 0.45 sec<br />

Applying this time in horizontal motion of parabolic<br />

path, BC = 4.43 × 0.45 = 2m<br />

During his flight as projectile, the sphere continues to<br />

rotate because of conservation of angular momentum.<br />

4. Two square metal plates of side 1 m are kept 0.01 m<br />

apart like a parallel plate capacitor in air in such a<br />

way that one of their edges is perpendicular to an oil<br />

surface in a tank filled with an insulating oil. The<br />

plates are connected to a battery of emf 500 V. The<br />

plates are then lowered vertically into the oil at a<br />

2<br />

1–x<br />

x<br />

1m<br />

d<br />

C = C 1 + C 2<br />

kε<br />

(x 1)<br />

= 0 × ε<br />

+<br />

d<br />

ε 0<br />

C = [kx + 1 – x]<br />

d<br />

[(1 − x)<br />

d<br />

0 ×<br />

After time dt, the dielectric rises by dx. The new<br />

equivalent capacitance will be<br />

C + dC = C 1´ + C 2´<br />

kε = 0<br />

ε<br />

[(x + dx) × 1] +<br />

0 [1 − x − dx) × 1]<br />

d<br />

d<br />

dC = Change of capacitance in time dt<br />

ε 0<br />

= [kx + kdx + 1 – x – dx – kx – 1 + x]<br />

d<br />

ε 0<br />

= d<br />

(k – 1)dx<br />

dC ε =<br />

0 dx ε (k – 1) =<br />

0 (k – 1)v ...(i)<br />

dt d dt d<br />

dx<br />

where v = dt<br />

We know that q = CV<br />

dq dC = V ...(ii)<br />

dt dt<br />

ε 0<br />

⇒ I = V (k – 1)v d<br />

From (i) and (ii)<br />

−12<br />

500×<br />

8.85×<br />

10<br />

I =<br />

(11 – 1) × 0.001<br />

0.01<br />

= 4.425 × 10 –9 Amp.<br />

5. Two resistors, 400 ohms, and 800 ohms are<br />

connected in series with a 6-volt battery. It is desired<br />

to measure the current in the circuit. An ammeter of a<br />

10 ohms resistance is used <strong>for</strong> this purpose. What<br />

will be the reading in the ammeter Similarly, If a<br />

voltmeter of 10,000 ohms resistance is used to<br />

measure the potential difference across the 400-ohms<br />

resistor, What will be the reading in the voltmeter.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1982]<br />

1]<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 8 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Sol. Applying Kirchoff's law moving in clockwise<br />

direction starting from battery we get<br />

400Ω 800Ω<br />

10Ω<br />

A<br />

6 volt<br />

+ 6 – 10I – 400 I – 800 I = 0<br />

∴ 6 = 1210 I<br />

6<br />

∴ I = = 4.96 × 10 –3 A<br />

1210<br />

The voltmeter and 400 Ω resistor are in parallel and<br />

hence p.d. will be same<br />

∴ 10,000 I 1 = 400 I 2<br />

...(i)<br />

Applying Kircoff's law in loop ABCDEA starting<br />

from A in clockwise direction.<br />

– 400 I 2 – 800 I + 6 = 0<br />

∴ 6 = 400 I 2 + 800 (I 1 + I 2 )<br />

∴ 6 = 400 I 2 + 800(0.04 I 2 + I 2 )<br />

From (i) putting the value of I 1<br />

∴ 6 = 1232 I 2<br />

10,000Ω<br />

B<br />

I<br />

A<br />

F<br />

V<br />

400Ω<br />

G<br />

C<br />

I<br />

800Ω<br />

6 volt<br />

∴ I 2 = 4.87 × 10 –3 Amp.<br />

Potential drop across 400 Ω resistor<br />

= I 2 × 400<br />

= 4.87 × 10 –3 × 400<br />

= 1.948 volt ≈ 1.95 volt<br />

∴ The reading measured by voltmeter = 1.95 volt<br />

D<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

6. At constant temperature and volume, X decomposes as<br />

2X(g) → 3Y(g) + 2Z(g); P x is the partial pressure of X.<br />

Observation Time (in minute) Rx (in mm of Hg)<br />

No.<br />

1 0 800<br />

2 100 400<br />

3 200 200<br />

(i) What is the order of reaction with respect to X <br />

(ii) Find the rate constant.<br />

(iii) Find the time <strong>for</strong> 75% completion of the reaction.<br />

(iv) Find the total pressure when pressure of X is<br />

700 mm of Hg. [<strong>IIT</strong>-2005]<br />

E<br />

Sol.<br />

(i) From the given data, it is evident that the t 1/2 (half-life<br />

period)<strong>for</strong> the decomposition of X (g) is constant<br />

(100 minutes) there<strong>for</strong>e the order of reaction is one.<br />

0.693<br />

(ii) Rate constant, K =<br />

t 1/ 2<br />

0.693<br />

= = 6.93 × 10 –3 min –1<br />

100<br />

(iii) Time taken <strong>for</strong> 75% completion of reaction<br />

= 2t 1/2 = 2 × 100 = 200 minutes<br />

(iv) 2x ⎯→ 2Y + 2Z<br />

Initial pressure 800 0 0<br />

Ater time t (800 – 2p) 3P 2p<br />

when the pressure of X is 700 mm of Hg the, 800 –<br />

2P = 700<br />

2P = 100; P = 50 mm of Hg<br />

Total pressure = 800 – 2P + 3P + 2P = 800 + 150<br />

= 950 mm of Hg.<br />

7. A acid solution of Cu 2+ salt containing 0.4 g of Cu 2+<br />

is electrolysed until all the copper is deposited. The<br />

electrolysis is continued <strong>for</strong> seven more minutes with<br />

the volume of solution kept at 100 ml. and the current<br />

at 1.2 amp. Calculate the volume of gases evolved at<br />

NTP during the entire electrolysis. [<strong>IIT</strong>-89]<br />

Sol. The chemical reactions taking place at the two<br />

electrodes are<br />

At cathode : Cu 2+ + 2e – → Cu<br />

H 2 O H + + OH –<br />

However, note that only Cu 2+ ions will be discharged<br />

so as these are present in solution and H + ions will be<br />

discharged only when all the cu 2+ ions have been<br />

deposited.<br />

Atcathode : 2OH – → H 2 O + O + 2e –<br />

O + O → O 2<br />

Thus in first case, Cu 2+ ion will be discharged at the<br />

cathode and O 2 gas at the anode. Let us calculate the<br />

volume of gas (O 2 ) discharged during electrolysis.<br />

According to Faraday's cecond law<br />

31.75 g Cu ≡ 8 g of oxygen<br />

≡ 5.6 litres of O 2 at NTP<br />

5.6<br />

0.4 g Cu = × 0.4 litres of O 2 at NTP<br />

31.75<br />

= 0.07055 litres = 70.55 ml<br />

As explained earlier, when all the Cu 2+ ion will be<br />

deposited at cathode, H + ions will start going to<br />

cathode liberating hydrogen (H 2 ) gas i.e.<br />

H + + e – H H + H → H 2<br />

However, the anode reaction remains same as<br />

previous. Thus in the second (latter) case, amount of<br />

H 2 collected at cathode should be calculated.<br />

8 g of O 2 = 1 g of H 2<br />

5.6 litres of O 2 at NTP = 11.2 litres of hydrogen<br />

Quantity of electricity passed after 1 st electrolysis,<br />

i.e. Q = i × t = 1.2 × 7 × 60 = 504 coulombs<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 9 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


5 .6×<br />

504<br />

504 coulombs will liberate = 96500<br />

= 29.24 ml<br />

of O 2 . Similarly, H 2 liberated by 504 coulombs<br />

504<br />

= 11.2 × 96500<br />

= 58.45 ml<br />

Total volume of O 2 liberated = 70.55 + 29.24 = 99.79<br />

ml vol. of H 2 liberated = 58.48 ml.<br />

8. Cyclobutyl bromide on treatment with magnesium in<br />

dry ether <strong>for</strong>ms an organometallic (A). The<br />

organometallic reacts with ethanal to give an alcohol<br />

(B) after mild acidification Prolonged treatment of<br />

alcohol (B) with an equivalent amount of HBr gives<br />

1-bromo 1-methylcyclopentane (C). Write the<br />

structures of (A), (B) and explain how (C) is obtained<br />

from (B).<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-2001]<br />

Br<br />

MgBr<br />

Sol.<br />

+<br />

CH CHO,H3O<br />

3<br />

⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯<br />

→<br />

H<br />

⎯ ⎯→<br />

+<br />

dry<br />

ether<br />

⎯ ⎯→<br />

Cyclobutymagnesium<br />

Bromide<br />

(A)<br />

CH–OH<br />

CH3<br />

1-Cyclobutylethanol<br />

(B)<br />

CH–CH 3<br />

OH 2<br />

⊕<br />

Oxonium ion<br />

ringexpansion<br />

⎯⎯⎯⎯→<br />

through1,2−alkylshift<br />

(B)<br />

CH–CH 3<br />

OH<br />

CH–CH 3<br />

– H O<br />

⎯ 2<br />

⎯ →<br />

⎯ +<br />

⎯<br />

H<br />

⊕ H<br />

CH 3<br />

H<br />

H<br />

⊕<br />

CH 3<br />

(3º carbocation)<br />

(ring expansion)<br />

(2º carbocation in<br />

5 membered ring<br />

H<br />

Br<br />

⎯ ⎯→<br />

–<br />

+<br />

(2º carbocation<br />

4-membered ring)<br />

,2–<br />

⎯<br />

1 ⎯→<br />

Hydrideshift<br />

H<br />

Br<br />

⊕<br />

CH 3<br />

1-bromo-1-methyl<br />

Cyclopentane<br />

(C)<br />

9. A basic, volatile nitrogen compound gave a foul<br />

smelling gas when treated with chloro<strong>for</strong>m and<br />

alcoholic potash. A 0.295 g sample of the substance.<br />

Dissolved in aq. HCl and treated with NaNO 2<br />

solution at 0ºC, liberated a colorless, odourless gas<br />

whose volume corresponded to 112 ml at STP, After<br />

the evolution of the gas was complete, the aqueous<br />

solution was distilled to give an organic liquid which<br />

did not contain nitrogen and which on warming with<br />

alkali and iodine gave a yellow precipitate. Identify<br />

the original substance. Assume that it contains one N<br />

atom per molecule.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-93]<br />

Sol. Let us summarise the given facts.<br />

112 ml of<br />

colourless,<br />

odourless<br />

gas at S.T.P<br />

+ Residue<br />

Distilled aq. Sol.<br />

(i) aq. HCl<br />

(ii) NaNO 2 0ºC<br />

Basic<br />

Nitrogen<br />

Compound<br />

(0.295 g)<br />

CHCl 3<br />

KOH<br />

Foul<br />

smelling<br />

gas<br />

Organic liquid OH – /I 2<br />

Yellow ppt.<br />

(no N)<br />

Reaction of the original compound with alcoholic<br />

potash and chloro<strong>for</strong>m to give foul smelling gas<br />

indicates that it contains a primary –NH 2 group.<br />

R–NH 2 + CHCl 3 + KOH ⎯→ R–NC↑<br />

(Basic compound)<br />

Carbylamine<br />

(foul smelling)<br />

Determination of mol. Weight of the amine.<br />

112 ml. of gas is evolved at S.T.P. by 0.295 g of<br />

amine<br />

0.295<br />

22400 ml. of gas is evolved by = × 22400 = 59<br />

112<br />

Hence the mol. wt. of the amine = 59<br />

∴ Mol. wt. of the alkyl group = 59 – 16 = 43<br />

–<br />

Nature of alkyl gp. of mol. wt.= 43 = C 3 H 7<br />

Thus the amine may be either<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 or CHNH 2<br />

CH 3<br />

The reaction of amine with NaNO 2 at 0ºC and all<br />

other reactions may thus be written as below.<br />

(i) HCl<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 ⎯⎯⎯→<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 OH +<br />

(ii) NaNO2<br />

/ 0ºC<br />

N 2 ↑<br />

n-Propylamine<br />

⎯<br />

aq ⎯<br />

.sol. ⎯<br />

distill ⎯⎯ → CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 OH<br />

⎯ OH<br />

–<br />

⎯ ⎯⎯ , I 2 → No yellow ppt.<br />

(CH 3 )CHNH 2 ⎯→ (CH 3 ) 2 CHOH + N 2 ↑<br />

Isopropylamine<br />

OH ,I<br />

⎯→ (CH 3 ) 2 CHOH ⎯ ⎯<br />

– ⎯⎯ 2→<br />

CHI3 ↓<br />

(Halo<strong>for</strong>mreaction)<br />

(yellow)<br />

Since the given reactions correspond to<br />

isopropylamine, the original compound is<br />

isopropylamine, (CH 3 ) 2 CHNH 2<br />

10. Interpret the non-linear shape of H 2 S molecule and<br />

non-planar shape of PCl 3 using valence shell electron<br />

pair repulsion (VSEPR) theory. (Atomic numbers :<br />

H = 1, P = 15, S = 16, Cl = 17.) [<strong>IIT</strong>-98]<br />

Sol. In H 2 S, no. of hybrid orbitals = 2<br />

1 (6 + 2 – 0 + 0) = 4<br />

Hence here sulphur is sp 3 hybridised, so<br />

16S = 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 2 2 1 1<br />

, 3 s 3p<br />

x<br />

3p<br />

y<br />

3p<br />

z<br />

144<br />

243<br />

4<br />

3<br />

sp hybridisation<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 10 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


x + y = 1<br />

a b<br />

S<br />

or<br />

H H<br />

H H<br />

Due to repulsion between lp - lp; the geometry of<br />

H 2 S is distorted from tetrahedral to V-shape.<br />

In PCl 3 , no. of hybrid orbitals = 2<br />

1 [5 + 3 – 0 + 0] = 4<br />

Hence, here P shows sp 3 -hybridisation<br />

15P = 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 2 1 1 1<br />

, 3 s 3p<br />

x<br />

3p<br />

y<br />

3p<br />

z<br />

144<br />

243<br />

4<br />

Cl<br />

P<br />

Cl<br />

3<br />

sp hybridisation<br />

Cl<br />

or<br />

Thus due to repulsion between lp – bp, geometry is<br />

distorted from tetrahedral to pyramidal.<br />

Cl<br />

S<br />

P<br />

Cl<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

11. The circle x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed in a<br />

triangle which has two of its sides along the<br />

coordinate axes. If the locus of the circumcentre of<br />

the triangle is<br />

2 2<br />

x + y – xy + k x + y = 0,<br />

find the value of k.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1987]<br />

Sol. Let OAB be the triangle in which the circle<br />

x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed. Let the<br />

x y<br />

equation of AB be + = 1<br />

a b<br />

y<br />

B(0,b)<br />

x´ O<br />

y´<br />

C<br />

2<br />

x y<br />

+ = 1<br />

a b<br />

(a, 0)A<br />

Since AB touches the circle x 2 + y 2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0.<br />

There <strong>for</strong>e,<br />

2 2<br />

+ −1<br />

a b<br />

1 1<br />

+<br />

2 2<br />

a b<br />

⎛ 2 2 ⎞<br />

⎜ + −1⎟<br />

a b<br />

= 2 ⇒ –<br />

⎝ ⎠<br />

= 2<br />

1 1<br />

+<br />

2 2<br />

a b<br />

x<br />

Cl<br />

[Q O(0, 0) and C(2, 2) lie on the same side of AB<br />

There<strong>for</strong>e, a<br />

2 + b<br />

2 – 1 < 0]<br />

(2b + 2a – ab)<br />

⇒ –<br />

= 2<br />

2 2<br />

a + b<br />

⇒ 2a + 2b – ab + 2<br />

2 2<br />

a + b = 0 ...(i)<br />

Let P(h, k) be the circumcentre of ∆OAB. Since<br />

∆ OAB is a right angled triangle. So its circumcentre<br />

is the mid-point of AB.<br />

a b<br />

∴ h = and k = 2 2<br />

⇒ a = 2h and b = 2k<br />

...(ii)<br />

From (i) and (ii), we get<br />

2 2<br />

4h + 4k – 4hk + 2 4 h + 4k = 0<br />

2<br />

⇒ h + k – hk + h + k = 0<br />

So, the locus of P(h, k) is<br />

2 2<br />

x + y – xy + x + y = 0<br />

But, the locus of the circumcentre is given to be<br />

2 2<br />

x + y – xy + k x + y = 0<br />

Thus, the value of k is 1<br />

12. If A, B, C are the angles of a triangle ABC and the<br />

system of linear equations<br />

x sin A + y sin B + z sin C = 0<br />

x sin B + y sin C + z sin A = 0<br />

x sin C + y sin A + z sin B = 0<br />

has a non trivial solution, prove that<br />

sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – (cos A + cos B + cos C<br />

+ cos A cos B + cos B cos C + cos C cos A) = 0<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-2002]<br />

Sol. The given system of linear equations has a non-trivial<br />

solution. There<strong>for</strong>e,<br />

sin A sin B sin C<br />

⇒<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

sin A + sin B + sin C<br />

sin B + sin C + sin A<br />

sin C + sin A + sin B<br />

2<br />

= 0<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

Applying C 1 → C 1 + C 2 + C 3<br />

⇒ (sin A + sin B + sin C)<br />

⇒<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

= 0<br />

sin C<br />

sin A<br />

sin B<br />

= 0<br />

sin C<br />

⎡Qsin A + sin B + sin C ⎤<br />

sin A = 0 ⎢ A B C ⎥<br />

⎢=<br />

4cos cos cos ≠ 0⎥<br />

sin B ⎣ 2 2 2 ⎦<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 11 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


⇒<br />

1<br />

0<br />

0<br />

sin B<br />

sin C − sin B sin A − sin C = 0<br />

sin A − sin B<br />

sin C<br />

sin B − sin C<br />

Applying R 2 → R 2 – R 1 , R 3 → R 3 – R 1<br />

⇒ –(sin B – sin C) 2 – (sin A – sin C)<br />

(sin A – sin B) = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 B + sin 2 C – 2 sin B sin C + sin 2 A<br />

– sin A sin B – sin C sin A + sin B sin C = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – sin A sin B – sin B sin C<br />

– sin C sin A = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – cos A cos B<br />

– cos B cos C – cos C cos A + cos (A + B)<br />

+ cos (B + C) + cos (C + A) = 0<br />

⇒ sin 2 A + sin 2 B + sin 2 C – cos A cos B<br />

– cos B cos C – cos C cos A – cos A<br />

– cos B – cos C = 0<br />

13. Determine the name of the name of the curve<br />

described parametrically by the equations<br />

x = t 2 + t + 1, y = t 2 – t + 1 [<strong>IIT</strong>-1998]<br />

Sol. We have,<br />

x = t 2 + t + 1 and, y = t 2 – t + 1<br />

⇒ x + y = 2(t 2 + 1) and, x – y = 2t<br />

⎪⎧<br />

2<br />

⎛ x − y ⎞ ⎪⎫<br />

⇒ x + y = 2 ⎨⎜<br />

⎟ + 1⎬<br />

⎪⎩ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎪⎭<br />

⇒ 2(x + y) = (x – y) 2 + 4<br />

⇒ x 2 + y 2 – 2xy – 2x – 2y + 4<br />

Comparing this equation with the equation<br />

ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, we get<br />

a = 1, b = 1, c = 4, h = –1, g = –1 and f = –1<br />

∴ abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg 2 – ch 2 = 4 – 2 – 1 – 1 – 4 ≠ 0<br />

and , h 2 – ab = 1 – 1 = 0<br />

Thus, we have<br />

∆ ≠ 0 and h 2 = ab<br />

So, the given equations represent a parabola.<br />

14. Let C be any circle with centre (0, 2 ). Prove that at<br />

most two rational points can be there on C.<br />

(A rational points is a point both of whose<br />

coordinates are rational numbers) [<strong>IIT</strong>-1997]<br />

Sol. The equation of any circle C with centre (0, 2 ) is<br />

given by<br />

(x – 0) 2 + (y – 2 ) 2 = r 2 , where r is any positive real<br />

number.<br />

or, x 2 + y 2 – 2 2 y = r 2 – 2<br />

If possible, let P(x 1 , y 1 ), Q(x 2 , y 2 ) and R(x 3 , y 3 ) be<br />

three distinct rational points on circle C. Then,<br />

2 2<br />

x1 + y1<br />

− 2 2 y 1 = r 2 – 2 ...(ii)<br />

2 2<br />

x 2 + y2<br />

− 2 2 y 2 = r 2 – 2 ...(iii)<br />

2 2<br />

x + y 2 2 y 3 = r 2 – 2 ...(iv)<br />

3 3 −<br />

We claim that at least two y 1 , y 2 , and y 3 are distinct.<br />

For if y 1 = y 2 = y 3 , then P, Q and R lie on a line<br />

parallel to x-axis and a line parallel to x-axis does not<br />

cross the circle in more than two points. Thus, we<br />

have either y 1 ≠ y 2 or, y 1 ≠ y 3 or, y 2 ≠ y 3 .<br />

Subtracting (ii) from (iii) and (iv), we get<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

(x 2 + y2)<br />

– (x1 + y1<br />

) – 2 2 (y 2 – y 1 ) = 0<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

and, (x3 + y3<br />

) – (x1 + y1<br />

) – 2 2 (y 3 – y 1 ) = 0<br />

⇒ a 1 – 2b 1 = 0 and a 2 – 2b 2 = 0 ...(v)<br />

where,<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

a 1 = (x 2 + y2)<br />

– (x1 + y1<br />

) , b 1 = 2(y 2 – y 1 )<br />

2 2 2 2<br />

a 2 = (x3 + y3<br />

) – (x1 + y1<br />

) , b 2 = 2(y 3 – y 1 )<br />

Clearly, a 1 , a 2 , b 1 , b 2 are rational numbers as x 1 , x 2 ,<br />

x 3 , y 1 , y 2 , y 3 are rational numbers.<br />

Since either y 1 ≠ y 2 or, y 1 ≠ y 3<br />

∴ Either b 1 ≠ 0 or, b 2 ≠ 0<br />

If b 1 ≠ 0, then<br />

a 1 – 2 b 1 = 0 [From (v)]<br />

⇒<br />

a<br />

b<br />

1<br />

1<br />

= 2,<br />

a1<br />

which is not possible because is a rational<br />

b1<br />

number and 2 is an irrational number.<br />

If b 2 ≠ 0, then<br />

a 2<br />

a 2 – 2b 2 = 0 ⇒ = 2,<br />

b<br />

2<br />

a 2<br />

which is not possible because is a rational<br />

b2<br />

number and 2 is an irrational number.<br />

Thus, in both the cases we arrive at a contradiction.<br />

This means that our supposition is wrong. Hence,<br />

there can be at most two rational points on circle C.<br />

15. A rectangle PQRS has its side PQ parallel to the line<br />

y = mx and vertices P, Q and S lie on the lines y = a,<br />

x = b and x = –b, respectively. Find the locus of the<br />

vertex R.<br />

[<strong>IIT</strong>-1996]<br />

Sol. Let the coordinates of R be (h, k). It is given that P<br />

lies on y = a. So, let the coordinates of P be (x 1 , a).<br />

Since PQ is parallel to the line y = mx. There<strong>for</strong>e,<br />

Slope of PQ = (Slope of y = mx) = m<br />

1<br />

And, Slope of PS = –<br />

(Slope of y = mx)<br />

= – m<br />

1<br />

[∴ PS ⊥ PQ]<br />

Now, equation of PQ is<br />

y – a = m(x – x 1 )<br />

...(i)<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 12 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


x = –b<br />

x´ S<br />

(0, – b)<br />

(0, a)<br />

R<br />

O<br />

y<br />

y = 0<br />

P<br />

y´<br />

x = b<br />

Q<br />

(0, b) x<br />

It is given that Q lies on x = b. So, Q is the point of<br />

intersection if (i) and x = b.<br />

Putting x = b in (i), we get<br />

y = a + m(b – x 1 )<br />

So, coordinates of Q are (b, a + m(b – x 1 )).<br />

Since PS passes through P(x 1 , a) and has slope – m<br />

1 .<br />

So, Equation of PS is y – a = – m<br />

1 (x – x1 ) ...(ii)<br />

It is given that S lies on x = – b. So, S is the point of<br />

intersection of (ii) and x = –b.<br />

Solving (ii) and x = – b, we get y = a + m<br />

1 (b + x1 )<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

So, coordinates of S are ⎜− b,a<br />

+ (b + x1<br />

) ⎟<br />

⎝ m ⎠<br />

1<br />

k − a − (b + x1)<br />

Now, Slope of RS =<br />

m<br />

= m<br />

h + b<br />

But RS is parallel to PQ.<br />

1<br />

k − a − (b + x1)<br />

∴<br />

m<br />

= m<br />

h + b<br />

⇒ b + x 1 = m(k – a) – m 2 (h + b) ...(iii)<br />

Similarly,<br />

k − a − m(b − x1)<br />

Slope of RQ =<br />

h − b<br />

But, RQ is perpendicular to PQ whose slope is m.<br />

k − a − m(b − x1)<br />

1<br />

∴<br />

= –<br />

h − b m<br />

1 1<br />

⇒ b – x 1 = (k – a) + m<br />

2 (h – a) ...(iv)<br />

m<br />

We have only one variable x 1 . To eliminate x 1 , add<br />

(iii) and (iv) to obtain<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

2b = (k – a) ⎜m + ⎟ – m 2 1<br />

(h + b) +<br />

⎝ m ⎠<br />

2 (h – b)<br />

m<br />

⎛ ⎞<br />

⇒ 2b = (k – a) ⎜<br />

m 2 + 1 ⎛<br />

4<br />

⎞<br />

⎟ – h ⎜<br />

m + 1 ⎛<br />

4<br />

⎞<br />

⎟ – b ⎜<br />

m + 1<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ m<br />

2<br />

⎠ ⎝ m<br />

2<br />

⎠ ⎝ m ⎠<br />

⎛ ⎞<br />

⇒ (k–a) ⎜<br />

m 2 2 2<br />

2<br />

+ 1<br />

⎟<br />

h (m −1)(m<br />

+ 1) b (m + 1)<br />

–<br />

–<br />

2<br />

2<br />

⎝ m ⎠ m<br />

m<br />

2<br />

=0<br />

h(m 2 −1)<br />

b(m 2 + 1)<br />

⇒ (k – a) – – = 0<br />

m m<br />

⇒ m(k – a) – h(m 2 – 1) – b(m 2 + 1) = 0<br />

Hence, the locus of R(h, k) is<br />

m(y – a) – x(m 2 – 1) – b(m 2 + 1) = 0<br />

BEWARE OF THE BATTERIES<br />

THAT YOU USE!<br />

Have you ever noticed that the batteries<br />

are becoming smaller and smaller day after day<br />

Many scientists and researchers have been finding<br />

the effective way to shrink the batteries into the<br />

smallest size as possible!<br />

In this case, Jae Kwon, an assistant professor of<br />

Electrical and computer engineering has recently<br />

developed a nuclear energy source, which is smaller,<br />

lighter and more efficient than the common<br />

batteries.<br />

Kwon’s described that the new discovered<br />

radioisotope battery can provide power density as<br />

much as six orders of magnitude higher than<br />

chemical batteries.<br />

Kwon and his research team members have been<br />

cooperated and working on building a small nuclear<br />

battery. According to the in<strong>for</strong>mation, the<br />

radioisotope batteries are having the size and<br />

thickness of a penny, but it’s powerful enough to<br />

power various micro or nanoelectromechanical<br />

systems.<br />

Even though the nuclear power sources have always<br />

been a safety concern, they’ve claimed to be safe, as<br />

the nuclear power sources have been used <strong>for</strong><br />

powering many types of devices, including the pacemakers,<br />

space satellites and underwater systems.<br />

Kwon’s battery is in a liquid semiconductor rather<br />

than a solid semiconductor, as he believed that the<br />

liquid semiconductor can overcome the problem,<br />

where the lattice structure of the semiconductor<br />

being damaged, if it’s in the solid semiconductor<br />

<strong>for</strong>m!<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 13 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Physics Challenging Problems<br />

This section is designed to give <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety<br />

of possible twists and turns of problems in physics that would be very helpful in facing<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and<br />

we hope that this section would prove a rich resource <strong>for</strong> practicing challenging problems<br />

and enhancing the preparation level of <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants.<br />

Solutions will be published in next issue<br />

1. A circuit consisting of a constant e.m.f. ‘E’, a self<br />

induction ‘L’ and a resistance ‘R’ is closed at<br />

t = 0. The relation between the current I in the<br />

circuit and time t is as shown by curve ‘a’ in the<br />

figure. When one or more of parameters E, R and<br />

L are changed, the curve ‘b’ is obtained. The<br />

steady state current is same in both the cases.<br />

Then it is possible that<br />

I<br />

(a)<br />

(b)<br />

t<br />

(A) E and R are kept constant and L is increased<br />

(B) E and R are kept constant and L is decreased<br />

(C) E and R are both halved and L is kept constant<br />

(D) E and L are kept constant and R is decreased<br />

2. Consider a resistor of uni<strong>for</strong>m cross section area<br />

connected to a battery of internal resistance zero.<br />

If the length of the resistor is doubled by<br />

stretching it then<br />

(A) current will become four times<br />

(B) the electric field in the wire will become half<br />

(C) the thermal power produced by the resistor<br />

will become one fourth<br />

(D) the product of the current density and<br />

conductance will become half<br />

3. In front of an earthed conductor a point charge +q<br />

is placed as shown in figure<br />

+q<br />

Set # 3<br />

By : Dev Sharma<br />

Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch<br />

Passage # (Q. No. 4 to Q. No. 6)<br />

Resistance value of an unknown resistor is<br />

calculated using the <strong>for</strong>mula R= V/I where V and<br />

I be the readings of the voltmeter and the<br />

ammeter respectively. Consider the circuits<br />

below. The internal resistances of the voltmeter<br />

and the ammeter (R V and R G respectively) are<br />

finite and non zero.<br />

V<br />

V<br />

A<br />

A<br />

R<br />

R<br />

E r E r<br />

Fig. (A)<br />

Fig. (B)<br />

Let R A and R B the calculated values in the two<br />

cases A and B respectively.<br />

4. The relation between R A and the actual value R is<br />

(A) R > R A (B) R < R A<br />

(C) R = R A (D) dependent upon E and r<br />

5. The relation between R B and the actual value R is<br />

(A) R< R B (B) R > R B<br />

(C) R = R B (D) dependent upon E and R<br />

6. If the resistance of voltmeter is R V = 1 KΩ and<br />

that of ammeter is R G = 1Ω, the magnitude of the<br />

percentage error in the measurement of R (the<br />

value of R is nearly 10 Ω) is<br />

(A) zero in both cases<br />

(B) non-zero but equal in both cases<br />

(C) more in circuit A<br />

(D) more in circuit B<br />

Passage # (Q. No. 7 to Q. No. 8)<br />

The figure shows the interference pattern obtained in<br />

a double-slit experiment using light of wavelength<br />

600 nm. 1,2,3,4 and 5 are marked on five fringes.<br />

(A) On the surface of conductor the net charge is<br />

always negative<br />

(B) On the surface of conductor at the same points<br />

charges are negative and at some points charges<br />

may be positive distributed non uni<strong>for</strong>mly<br />

(C) Inside the conductor electric field due to point<br />

charge is non-zero<br />

(D) None of these<br />

7. The third order bright fringe is<br />

(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5<br />

8. Which fringe results from a phase difference of 4 π<br />

between the light waves incidenting from two slits<br />

(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 14 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


1.[C]<br />

8<br />

Questions were Published in June Issue<br />

Initially the potential at centre of sphere is<br />

⎛ x − e ⎞ ⎛ x − 0 ⎞<br />

4 ⎜ ⎟ + ⎜ ⎟ = 0<br />

1 Q 1 2Q 1 3Q<br />

⎝ r ⎠ ⎝ r ⎠<br />

VC<br />

= + =<br />

4πε0<br />

x 4πε0<br />

x 4πε0<br />

x<br />

5x = 4e x = 4e/5<br />

2<br />

After the sphere grounded, potential at centre<br />

x 2Bωa<br />

and<br />

⎧ e 4e ⎫<br />

i = =<br />

⎨i<br />

= = ⎬<br />

becomes zero. Let the net charge on sphere finally<br />

r 5 ⎩ r + r / 4 5r ⎭<br />

be q.<br />

1 q 1 3Q 3Qr<br />

6. (A) → R , (B) → Q,S, (C) → P, (D) → Q,R<br />

∴ + = 0 or q =<br />

→<br />

4πε0<br />

r 4πε0<br />

x<br />

x<br />

(A) F = constant and → u × →<br />

F = 0<br />

3Qr<br />

∴The charge flowing out of sphere is<br />

x<br />

2. [D] The velocity is maximum at mean position.<br />

Hence the magnetic <strong>for</strong>ce on block is maximum,<br />

at its mean position.<br />

The magnetic <strong>for</strong>ce on the block while it crosses<br />

the mean position towards right and left is as<br />

shown<br />

N 1<br />

v max v max<br />

qv max B<br />

Mg + qv max B mg<br />

Case-1 Case-2<br />

Hence normal reaction is maximum in case-1 and<br />

minimum in case-2. Hence correct option is D.<br />

3. (A) → Q,R, (B) → P,S, (C) → P,R, (D) → Q,S<br />

4. [A,B,C]<br />

Total charge =<br />

∫ Idt = area under curve = 10C<br />

Average current =<br />

∫<br />

∫<br />

Idt<br />

= 5A<br />

dt<br />

Total heat produced =<br />

∫ I 2 Rdt<br />

2<br />

2 200<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

( −5t<br />

+ 10) .1.dt = J<br />

3<br />

0<br />

Maximum power = I 2 R, when I is maximum current<br />

= 100 × 1 =100W.<br />

5. [B,D] Equivalent circuit<br />

r/2 ε r/2<br />

x<br />

x<br />

ε r<br />

x<br />

2 2<br />

Bωr<br />

Bωa<br />

Induced emf e = = (∴ Radius = a)<br />

2 2<br />

By nodal equation, nodal<br />

Solution<br />

Set # 2<br />

Physics Challenging Problems<br />

N 2<br />

There<strong>for</strong>e initial velocity is either in direction of<br />

constant <strong>for</strong>ce or opposite to it. Hence the particle<br />

will move in straight line and speed may increase<br />

or decrease.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 15 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong><br />

7. [B]<br />

8. [B,C]<br />

→ →<br />

→<br />

and F = constant<br />

(B) u . F = 0<br />

Initial velocity is perpendicular to constant <strong>for</strong>ce,<br />

hence the path will be parabolic with speed of<br />

particle increasing.<br />

→ →<br />

(C) v . F = 0 means instantaneous velocity is<br />

always perpendicular to <strong>for</strong>ce. Hence the speed<br />

→<br />

|<br />

will remain constant. And also | F = constant.<br />

Since the particle moves in one plane, the<br />

resulting motion has to be circular.<br />

→<br />

∧<br />

∧<br />

→<br />

(D) u = 2 i−<br />

3 j and a = 6 i − 9 j . Hence initial<br />

velocity is in same direction of constant<br />

acceleration, there<strong>for</strong>e particle moves in straight<br />

line with increasing speed.<br />

C r<br />

r θ<br />

R<br />

q<br />

φ<br />

total<br />

O<br />

v 0<br />

v 0<br />

r<br />

mv0<br />

r = ; R = 2r sin θ<br />

qB<br />

=<br />

qBR<br />

2m sin<br />

×<br />

× × × ×<br />

× h<br />

dr<br />

⎛ µ 0N<br />

× h R + b ⎞<br />

= ⎜ log ⎟ × I<br />

⎝ 2π<br />

R ⎠<br />

dφ e = total<br />

dt<br />

θ<br />

∧<br />

∧<br />

µ<br />

dφ<br />

= B × hdr =<br />

max<br />

0<br />

NIhdr<br />

2πr<br />

× sin ωt


PHYSICS<br />

Students'Forum<br />

Expert’s Solution <strong>for</strong> Question asked by <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Aspirants<br />

1. A particle of mass m moves along a horizontal circle<br />

of radius R such that normal acceleration of particle<br />

varies with time as a n = Kt 2 , where K is a constant.<br />

Calculate<br />

(i) tangential <strong>for</strong>ce on particle at time t,<br />

(ii) total <strong>for</strong>ce on particle at time t,<br />

(iii) Power developed by total <strong>for</strong>ce at time t, and<br />

(iv) average power developed by total <strong>for</strong>ce over<br />

first t second.<br />

Sol. Since, the particle is moving along a circle,<br />

there<strong>for</strong>e, its normal acceleration is centripetal<br />

acceleration i.e. v 2 /R, where v is velocity of particle<br />

at time t.<br />

v 2<br />

∴ = Kt 2 or v = t. KR<br />

R<br />

…(1)<br />

Due to centripetal acceleration, particle follows a<br />

circular path but due to it velocity its magnitude<br />

does not change. Velocity magnitude increases due<br />

to tangential acceleration alone.<br />

d<br />

∴ Tangential acceleration, a t = . v = KR<br />

dt<br />

∴ Tangential <strong>for</strong>ce, F t = ma t = m KR<br />

Ans. (i)<br />

Normal <strong>for</strong>ce, F n = ma n = mKt 2<br />

∴ Resultant <strong>for</strong>ce on particle,<br />

2 2<br />

F = F + F<br />

t<br />

= m K(R + K t )<br />

Ans. (ii)<br />

Since, power developed by <strong>for</strong>ce → F is given by<br />

→ →<br />

v<br />

P = F , there<strong>for</strong>e, power developed by normal<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce F n is always zero because its direction is<br />

always perpendicular to the instantaneous direction<br />

of motion of the particle. Hence, power is developed<br />

by tangential <strong>for</strong>ce alone. Figure<br />

F t<br />

F n<br />

i.e.<br />

P = F → → t v = mkRt Ans.(iii)<br />

Since, resultant <strong>for</strong>ce equals (mass × acceleration),<br />

there<strong>for</strong>e, resultant <strong>for</strong>ce is used to accelerate the<br />

v<br />

n<br />

4<br />

body. It means that velocity of the body increases<br />

due to resultant <strong>for</strong>ce. Hence power developed by<br />

resultant <strong>for</strong>ce is used to increase kinetic energy of<br />

the body.<br />

∴ Average power developed by resultant<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce = Average rate of increase of KE<br />

Initial kinetic energy (at t = 0), E 0 = 0<br />

Kinetic energy at time t, E = 2<br />

1 mv<br />

2<br />

= 2<br />

1 mKRt<br />

2<br />

…(2)<br />

∴<br />

E – E<br />

Average power =<br />

t<br />

1<br />

= mKRt` 2 Ans. (iv)<br />

2. Figure Shows a particle of mass m = 100 gm,<br />

attached with four identical springs, each of length<br />

l = 10 cm. Initial tension in each spring is<br />

F 0 = 25 newton. Neglecting gravity, calculate period<br />

of small oscillations of the particle along a line<br />

perpendicular to the plane of the figure<br />

B<br />

A<br />

P<br />

m<br />

D<br />

Sol. Let the particle be displaced slightly through x along<br />

a line normal to plane of the figure. Then each<br />

spring is further elongated. Since, springs are<br />

identical, there<strong>for</strong>e, increase in tension of each<br />

spring will be the same. Let this increase be dE 0 .<br />

l<br />

l<br />

A<br />

θ<br />

θ<br />

C<br />

C<br />

(F 0 + dF 0 ) (F 0 + dF 0 )<br />

P<br />

First considering <strong>for</strong>ces exerted by spring AP and<br />

CP only as shown in Figure.<br />

Restoring <strong>for</strong>ce produced by these two springs = (F 0<br />

+ dF 0 ) 2 sin θ<br />

x<br />

Since x is very small, there<strong>for</strong>e, sin θ ≈<br />

l<br />

Neglecting product of very small quantities,<br />

restoring <strong>for</strong>ce produced by these two springs<br />

C<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 16 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


= 2F 0<br />

l<br />

x<br />

Similarly, restoring <strong>for</strong>ce produced by two<br />

remaining springs BP and DP will also be equal to<br />

⎛ 2F<br />

⎞<br />

⎜ 0 x<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ l ⎠<br />

⎛ 2F<br />

⎞<br />

∴ Resultant restoring <strong>for</strong>ce, F = 2 × ⎜ 0 x 4F<br />

⎟ = 0<br />

.x<br />

⎝ l ⎠ l<br />

∴ Restoring acceleration is directly proportional to<br />

displacement x, there<strong>for</strong>e, the particle executes<br />

SHM,<br />

∴ Its period T = 2π<br />

displacement<br />

acceleration<br />

ml<br />

or T = 2π =<br />

4F 0<br />

ml<br />

π = 0.02π sec<br />

F 0<br />

Ans.<br />

3. Find the electric potential, at any point on the axis of<br />

a uni<strong>for</strong>mly charged circular disc, whose surface<br />

charge density is σ, radius, a.<br />

Sol. Let us consider a small elemental thin ring of width<br />

dy.<br />

Area of the ring = 2πy dy<br />

Charge on this elemental ring = (2πy dy)σ<br />

Again, we can consider that this ring is divided into<br />

a large number of small elements. Each such<br />

element e is at the same distance from P. Hence,<br />

potential produced by this ring of width dy at the<br />

point P is given by dV, where<br />

1 2πyσdy<br />

dV =<br />

4πε<br />

2 2<br />

0 r + y<br />

e<br />

y<br />

2 2<br />

r + y<br />

O<br />

a<br />

r<br />

P<br />

Again, each ring as we go from centre to rim,<br />

produces different contributions. Since the distance<br />

of each ring from P changes as y increases from 0 to<br />

a, hence, total potential produced by the whole ring,<br />

a<br />

V =<br />

∫<br />

dV<br />

y = 0<br />

a 2πσ<br />

ydy<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

.<br />

0 4πε<br />

2 2<br />

0 r + y<br />

σ a ydy<br />

=<br />

2ε<br />

∫ 2<br />

r +<br />

0 2<br />

0 y<br />

Put (r<br />

2 2<br />

+ y ) = P<br />

∴ r 2 + y 2 = p 2<br />

or 2ydy = 2pdp<br />

∴<br />

∫<br />

ydy pdp<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

r 2 + y<br />

2 p<br />

σ a ydy<br />

∴<br />

2ε<br />

∫ 2<br />

r +<br />

=<br />

∫ dp = p = 2 2<br />

r + y<br />

0 2<br />

0 y<br />

=<br />

σ<br />

2ε<br />

0<br />

⎡<br />

⎢⎣<br />

=<br />

r<br />

2<br />

σ<br />

ε<br />

0<br />

⎡<br />

⎢⎣<br />

+ a<br />

σ<br />

∴ V =<br />

⎡ 2 2<br />

r + a − r<br />

⎤<br />

2ε0<br />

⎢⎣ ⎥⎦<br />

As a special case, if r >> a<br />

2<br />

r<br />

1/ 2<br />

2<br />

− r<br />

⎤<br />

⎥⎦<br />

+ y<br />

⎡<br />

2<br />

2 2 ⎛ a ⎞ ⎤ ⎡<br />

2<br />

1 a ⎤<br />

r + a = r ⎢1<br />

+ ⎜ ⎟ ⎥ ≈ r ⎢1<br />

+<br />

2<br />

⎥<br />

⎢⎣<br />

⎝ r ⎠ ⎥⎦<br />

⎢⎣<br />

2 r ⎥⎦<br />

σ a 2 π q<br />

or, V = . × =<br />

2ε 0 2r<br />

π 4πε 0 r<br />

[Q πa 2 = A and Aσ = q]<br />

i.e., the result is the same as if all the charge is<br />

concentrated at the centre of the ring.<br />

4. Three concentric, conducting spherical shells A,B<br />

and C have radii a = 10 cm, b = 20 cm and c = 30<br />

cm respectively. The innermost shell A is earthed<br />

and charges q 2 = 4µC and q 3 = 3 µC are given to<br />

shells B and C respectively. Calculate charge q 1<br />

induced on shell A and energy stored in the system.<br />

Sol. System of three concentric shells is as shown in<br />

Figure(A) Since, Shell A is earthed, there<strong>for</strong>e its<br />

potential is zero. But its potential is<br />

∴<br />

q 3<br />

q 2<br />

q 1<br />

V =<br />

a<br />

4πε<br />

C<br />

B<br />

A<br />

(A)<br />

b<br />

⎡q1<br />

⎢<br />

⎣ a<br />

c<br />

q 2<br />

+<br />

b<br />

C B<br />

q ⎤<br />

+<br />

c<br />

⎥ ⎦<br />

1 3<br />

0<br />

(–3µC)<br />

A<br />

a<br />

2<br />

⎤<br />

⎥⎦<br />

(B)<br />

b<br />

a<br />

0<br />

(+4µC)<br />

(–1µC) (+1µC)<br />

(+3µC)<br />

⎛ q1 q 2 q3<br />

⎞<br />

⎜ + + ⎟ = 0<br />

⎝ a b c ⎠<br />

or q 1 = – 3µC<br />

Ans.<br />

Now, charges on different surface will be as shown<br />

in Figure(B) to calculate energy stored in the<br />

system, it can be as considered in three parts :<br />

(i) a spherical capacitor having radii a and b and<br />

having charge |q 1 | 3µC.<br />

c<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 17 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


∴<br />

4πε0 Its capacitance, C 1 =<br />

ab<br />

(b – a)<br />

(ii) a spherical capacitor having radii b and c and<br />

having charge (q 2 + q 1 ) = 1 µC.<br />

4πε0 Its capacitance. C 2 =<br />

bc<br />

(c – b)<br />

(iii) an isolated sphere of radius c and having charge<br />

(q 3 + q 2 + q 1 ) = 4µC<br />

Energy stored in the system<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2<br />

q ( q1<br />

+ q 2)<br />

( q1<br />

+ q 2 + q3)<br />

= +<br />

+<br />

2C 2C2<br />

2C3<br />

= 0.45 joule Ans.<br />

5. In the circuit shown in Figure emf of each battery is<br />

E = 20 volts and capacitance is C 1 = 5 µF, C 2 = 3 µF<br />

and C 3 = 6 µF. Calculate charge on capacitor C 3<br />

when switch S is closed and steady state is reached.<br />

Calculate also, heat generated in the circuit.<br />

2<br />

E<br />

C 1 C 3 C 1<br />

+ – + – + –<br />

+ + +<br />

– C 2 – (q 1 –q 2 ) C 2<br />

q<br />

– 2<br />

(B)<br />

S<br />

+<br />

– E<br />

Applying Kirchhoff's voltage law on left mesh, of<br />

Figure (B)<br />

q1<br />

q1<br />

– q 2<br />

+ – E = 0 …(1)<br />

C1<br />

C2<br />

For middle mesh,<br />

q 2 q 2 q1<br />

– q 2<br />

+ – = 0 …(2)<br />

C3<br />

C2<br />

C2<br />

From equation (1) and (2), q 1 = 50 µC and<br />

q 2 = 20 µC<br />

Now consider the circuit when switch S is closed<br />

and steady state is reached. The circuit will be as<br />

shown in Figure (C)<br />

Sol.<br />

E + –<br />

C 1<br />

C 2<br />

C 3 C 1<br />

C 2<br />

S<br />

+<br />

–<br />

E<br />

When Switch S is closed and steady state is<br />

reached, the circuit becomes symmetric about the<br />

dotted line shown in Figure(A).<br />

E + –<br />

C 1<br />

C 2<br />

C 3 C 1<br />

C 2<br />

(A)<br />

+<br />

–<br />

E<br />

Right part of the circuit is exactly mirror image of<br />

the left part. Hence, charges on both plates of<br />

capacitor C 3 should be identical. But charges on<br />

plates of a capacitor are always opposite to each<br />

other. It means one of the plates is always positively<br />

charged and the other is negatively charged. Both<br />

these conditions can be satisfied only if charge on<br />

capacitor C 3 is zero.<br />

To calculate heat generated in the circuit initial and<br />

final charges on all the capacitors must be known.<br />

First analyse the circuit when switch S was open<br />

Charges on capacitors will be as shown in<br />

Figure (B)<br />

E<br />

C C 3 1 C 1<br />

+ – – + q<br />

– C + +<br />

2 C + q<br />

–<br />

q 2 – q<br />

(C)<br />

+<br />

–<br />

E<br />

Applying Kirchhoff's voltage law on left mesh of<br />

Figure(C)<br />

q q + – E = 0 or q = 37.5 µC.<br />

C 1 C2<br />

After shorting of switch S, increase in charge on<br />

capacitor C 1 of<br />

Left mesh, ∆q 1 = (q – q 1 ) = – 12.5 µC<br />

That <strong>for</strong> capacitor C 2 of left mesh,<br />

∆q 2 = q – (q 1 –q 2 ) = 7.5 µC<br />

That <strong>for</strong> capacitor C 3 , ∆q 3 = 0 – q 2 = – 20µC<br />

That <strong>for</strong> capacitor C 2 of right mesh,<br />

∆q 4 = (q –q 2 ) = 17.5 µC<br />

That <strong>for</strong> capacitor C 1 or right mesh,<br />

∆q 5 = q – 0 = 37.5 µC<br />

Since, heat generated in the circuit is given by<br />

2<br />

( ∆q)<br />

H = ∑<br />

2C<br />

H =<br />

(∆q1)<br />

2C<br />

1<br />

2<br />

+<br />

(∆q 2)<br />

2C<br />

2<br />

2<br />

+<br />

(∆q3)<br />

2C<br />

(∆q 4)<br />

(∆q5)<br />

+ +<br />

2C2<br />

2C1<br />

= 250 × 10 –6 joule Ans.<br />

3<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 18 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Capacitor-1<br />

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY<br />

Capacitance :<br />

Whenever charge is given to a conductor of any<br />

shape its potential increases. The more the charge (Q)<br />

given to the conductor the more is its potential (V)<br />

i.e. Q ∝ V<br />

⇒ Q = CV<br />

where C is constant of proportionality called<br />

capacitance of the conductor C = Q/V, C = Q<br />

SI unit of capacitance is farad (F) and 1 F = 1<br />

coulomb/volt (1CV –1 )<br />

Energy stored in a charged capacitor :<br />

1 2 Q 2 1<br />

W = CV 0 = = QV0<br />

2 2C 2<br />

Capacitance of an isolated sphere :<br />

Let a conducting sphere of radius a acquire a<br />

potential V when a charge Q is given to it. The<br />

potential acquired by the sphere is<br />

Q Q<br />

V = ⇒ C = = 4πε0 a<br />

4πε 0 a V<br />

Charge sharing Between two charged conductors :<br />

C 1<br />

V 1<br />

C 2<br />

V 2<br />

q 1 = C 1 V 1 q 2 = C 2 V 2<br />

(Initially)<br />

C 1<br />

V<br />

C 2<br />

V<br />

q´1 = C 1 V q´2 = C 2 V<br />

(Finally)<br />

C1V1<br />

+ C2V2<br />

V =<br />

C1<br />

+ C2<br />

There is always a loss in energy during the sharing<br />

process as some energy gets converted to heat.<br />

Loss = – ∆U =<br />

1 ⎛ C ⎜<br />

1C2<br />

2 ⎝ C 1 C<br />

+ 2<br />

⎞<br />

⎟ (V 1 – V 2 ) 2<br />

⎠<br />

Capacitor or Condenser :<br />

An arrangement which has capability of collecting<br />

(and storing) charge and whose capacitance can be<br />

varied is called a capacitor (or condenser)<br />

The capacitance of a capacitor depends.<br />

(a) directly on the size of the conductors of the<br />

capacitor.<br />

(b) directly on the dielectric constant K of the<br />

medium between the conductors.<br />

(c) inversely on the distance of separation between<br />

the conductor.<br />

Principle of a condenser :<br />

Consider a conducting plate A which is given a<br />

charge Q such that its potential rises to V. Then<br />

C = Q/V<br />

Let us place another identical conducting plate B<br />

parallel to it such that charge is induced on plate B<br />

(as shown in figure).<br />

A<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

Q<br />

If V – is the potential at A due to induced negative<br />

charge on B and V + is the potential at A due to<br />

induced positive charge on B, then<br />

A B<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

Q Q<br />

C´ = =<br />

V´ V + V+ − V−<br />

Since V´ < V (as the induced negative charge lies<br />

closer to the plate A in comparison to induced<br />

positive charge).<br />

⇒ C´ > C<br />

Further, if B is earthed from the outer side<br />

(see figure) then V n = V – V – as the entire positive<br />

charge flows to the earth. So<br />

C" =<br />

Q Q =<br />

V − V−<br />

n<br />

V<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

⇒ C n >> C<br />

So, if an identical earthed conductor is placed in the<br />

viscinty of a charged conductor then the capacitance<br />

of the charged conductor increases appreciably. This<br />

is the principle of a parallel plate capacitor.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 19 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Parallel Plate Capacitor :<br />

A<br />

–σ<br />

d<br />

B<br />

+ σ<br />

A<br />

+<br />

+<br />

A = Area of plate +<br />

d = Separation +<br />

between the +<br />

plates +<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

–<br />

B<br />

σ<br />

E = =<br />

σ<br />

ε kε0<br />

It consists of two metallic plates A and B each of area<br />

A at separation d. Plate A is positively charged and<br />

plate B is earthed. If K is the dielectric constant of<br />

the material medium and E is the field that exists<br />

between the two plates, then<br />

⇒<br />

σ σ<br />

E = = ε Kε0<br />

V =<br />

d<br />

q<br />

K<br />

ε 0<br />

A<br />

⎧ V<br />

⎨Q<br />

E = and σ =<br />

⎩ d<br />

q Kε<br />

⇒ C = = 0 A<br />

V d<br />

If medium between the plates is air or vacuum, then<br />

K = 1<br />

⇒ C 0 =<br />

ε 0 A<br />

d<br />

Special Case I :<br />

When the space between the parallel plate capacitor<br />

is partly filled with a dielectric of thickness t(


1<br />

⇒ E =<br />

ε (σ – σ Case II : When battery is connected to A, then C 1<br />

p) ...(1)<br />

and C 2 are in series.<br />

0<br />

1 1 1<br />

σ<br />

⇒ = +<br />

Also E =<br />

...(2)<br />

C C1<br />

C2<br />

Kε 0<br />

Compare (1) and (2), we get<br />

1 b − a 1 1<br />

⇒ = +<br />

C ab 4πε 1<br />

ε (σ – σ σ<br />

0 K 4πε 0 Kb<br />

p) =<br />

0 Kε 0<br />

1 1 ⎛ b − a ⎞<br />

⇒ = ⎜ + 1 ⎟⎠<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

C 4πε0Kb<br />

⎝ a<br />

⇒ σ p = σ ⎜1<br />

− ⎟<br />

⎝ K ⎠ 1 1 ⎛ b ⎞<br />

⇒ = ⎜ ⎟⎠<br />

q p q ⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

C 4πε0Kb<br />

⎝ a<br />

⇒ = ⎜1<br />

− ⎟⎠<br />

A A ⎝ K ⇒ C = 4πε 0 Ka<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

Case III : When battery connected to A and B is<br />

⇒ q p = q ⎜1<br />

− ⎟ earthed. Then C<br />

⎝ K 2 can be omitted as it will not receive<br />

⎠ any charge.<br />

Spherical capacitor :<br />

So, C = C 1<br />

B<br />

b<br />

⎛ ab ⎞<br />

⇒ C = 4πε 0 K ⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ b − a ⎠<br />

a C<br />

C 2<br />

1<br />

Case IV : When battery connected to B and A is<br />

A<br />

open circuited (or made non conducted) then C 1 can<br />

be omitted (as it is open circuited). So,<br />

let C 1 be the capacitance in between the two<br />

C = C 2 ⇒ C = 4πε 0 Kb<br />

conductors and C 2 be capacitance out side both.<br />

Cylindrical capacitor :<br />

To find C 1 :<br />

Let inner cylinder be given a charge per unit length<br />

Imagine the outer surface of B to be earthed. Then –q<br />

is the charge induced on the inner surface of B.<br />

⎛ q ⎞<br />

of λ ⎜ = ⎟ . A charge – q is induced on length l at<br />

If V is the potential difference between the two<br />

⎝ l ⎠<br />

surfaces, then<br />

inner surface of outer cylinder<br />

q −q<br />

V = +<br />

4πε 0 Ka 4πε 0 Kb<br />

b<br />

q<br />

a<br />

–q<br />

q ⎛ 1 1 ⎞<br />

⇒ V = ⎜ − ⎟<br />

4πε 0 K ⎝ a b ⎠<br />

l<br />

q ⎛ ab ⎞<br />

⇒ C = = 4πε0 K ⎜ ⎟ ...(1)<br />

V ⎝ b − a ⎠<br />

To find C,<br />

λ<br />

E = <strong>for</strong> a < r < b<br />

Imagine A to be made open circuited (i.e. made non<br />

2πε0r<br />

conducting), then<br />

dV λ<br />

C 2 = 4πε 0 Kb ...(2)<br />

⇒ – = dr 2πε0Kr<br />

Case I : When battery is connected to B and A is<br />

outer<br />

earthed. Then C 1 and C 2 are in parallel<br />

surface<br />

r=<br />

b<br />

λ dr<br />

⇒ C = C 1 + C 2<br />

⇒<br />

∫<br />

dV = –<br />

2πε<br />

∫<br />

⎛ ab ⎞<br />

inner<br />

0 K r r=<br />

a<br />

⇒ C = 4πε 0 K ⎜ ⎟ + 4πε 0 Kb<br />

surface<br />

⎝ b − a ⎠<br />

λ ⎛ b ⎞<br />

⎛ ⎞<br />

⇒ C = 4πε 0 K ⎜<br />

b 2 ⇒ V inner surface – V outer surface = log e ⎜ ⎟<br />

⎟<br />

2πε0K<br />

⎝ a ⎠ ⎝ b − a ⎠<br />

Since, inner surface is at higher potential and outer at<br />

lower potential, so<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 21 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


1<br />

Energy U' = C'V'<br />

2<br />

–q<br />

2<br />

b<br />

(b) If a dielectric slab (dielectric constant k) is<br />

a<br />

introduced between two plates then<br />

+q<br />

E<br />

V' = V, C' = kC, q' = kq, E' = ; U' = KU k<br />

(p.d.) will not change)<br />

Gaussian surface<br />

λ ⎛ b ⎞<br />

⇒ V outer surface – V inner surface = log e ⎜ ⎟ Solved Examples<br />

2πε0K<br />

⎝ a ⎠<br />

q ⎛ b ⎞<br />

1. A capacitor of 20 µF and charged to 500 volt is<br />

⇒ V inner surface – V outer surface = log e ⎜ ⎟ connected in parallel with another capacitor of 10 µF<br />

2πε 0 lK<br />

⎝ a ⎠<br />

charged to 200 volt. Find the common potential.<br />

q<br />

2πε0 K<br />

⇒ C =<br />

=<br />

l<br />

Sol. Charge on one capacitor q 1 = C 1 V 1<br />

V inner surface − Vouter<br />

surface ⎛ b ⎞<br />

∴ q 1 = 20 × 10 –6 × 500 = 0.01 coulomb<br />

loge⎜<br />

⎟<br />

Charge on second capacitor<br />

⎝ a ⎠<br />

q 2 = 10 × 10 –6 × 200 = 0.002 coulomb<br />

2πε<br />

K<br />

⇒ C =<br />

0l<br />

The charge on the two capacitors<br />

⎛ b ⎞<br />

q = q 1 + q 2 = 0.01 + 0.002 = 0.003 coulomb<br />

loge⎜<br />

⎟<br />

Total capacity C = C<br />

⎝ a ⎠<br />

1 + C 2<br />

= 20 × 10 –6 + 10 × 10 –6<br />

1<br />

(A) Energy stored in a capacitor E = CV<br />

2 1 = 30 × 10 –6 Farad.<br />

= QV<br />

2 2<br />

Common potential = q/C<br />

2<br />

1 Q<br />

1<br />

0.012<br />

= and energy stored per unit volume = ε0 E 2<br />

= = 400 Volt.<br />

−6<br />

2 C<br />

2 30×<br />

10<br />

Note: The energy is stored in a capacitor is in the<br />

2. A battery of 10V is connected to a capacitor of<br />

<strong>for</strong>m of electric field between the plates.<br />

capacity of 0.1 F. The battery is now removed and<br />

(B) A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery and<br />

this capacitor is connected to a second uncharged<br />

then the capacitor disconnected from the battery<br />

capacitor. If the charge distributes equally on these<br />

(a) If the distance between plates of the capacitor is<br />

two capacitors, find the total energy stored in the two<br />

increased then the new parameter of the capacitors as<br />

capacitors. Further, compare this energy with the<br />

compared to the previous parameters is<br />

initial energy stored in the first capacitor.<br />

Sol. The initial energy stored in the first capacitor.<br />

ε<br />

q' = q; C' = 0 A q '<br />

, V' = ,<br />

1<br />

d' C'<br />

U 0 = CV<br />

2<br />

2<br />

V '<br />

1<br />

E' = (charge will not change) Energy = C'V'<br />

2<br />

1<br />

= × 0.1 × (10) 2 = 5.0 J<br />

d'<br />

2 2<br />

If a dielectric slab (dielectric constant k) is<br />

When this capacitor is connected to the second<br />

introduced between the plates then<br />

uncharged capacitor, the charge distributes equally.<br />

This shows that the capacitance of the second<br />

V E<br />

U<br />

q' = q, C' = kC, V' = , E' = U'(Energy) = capacitor is also C. The voltage across each capacitor<br />

k k k will be V/2. If U be the energy stored in the two<br />

(charge will not change)<br />

capacitors, then<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 ⎛ V ⎞ 1 ⎛ V ⎞<br />

(C) A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery.<br />

U = C ⎜ ⎟⎠ + C ⎜ ⎟⎠ 2 ⎝ 2 2 ⎝ 2<br />

(a) If the distance between plates of the capacitor is<br />

Increased (with the battery connected) then the new<br />

1<br />

= CV 2 = 2.5 J<br />

parameters of the capacitors as compared to the<br />

4<br />

previous parameters is<br />

U 2.5 1 = =<br />

ε<br />

V' = V, C' = 0 A<br />

V '<br />

U<br />

, q' = C'V', E' = , 0 5. 0 2<br />

d'<br />

d<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 22 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


3. Two isolated metallic solid spheres of radii R and 2R<br />

are charged such that both of these have same charge<br />

density σ. The spheres are located far away from<br />

each other, and connected by a thin conducting wire.<br />

Find the new charge density on the bigger sphere.<br />

Sol. Charge on smaller sphere<br />

Q 1 = 4πR 2 . σ<br />

Charge on bigger sphere<br />

Q 2 = 4π(2R) 2 σ = 16πR 2 σ<br />

∴ Total charge Q = Q 1 + Q 2 = 20πR 2 σ ...(1)<br />

Capacitances of two spherical conductors are<br />

C 1 = 4πε 0 R and C 2 = 4πε 0 (2R)<br />

∴ Total capacitance<br />

C = C 1 + C 2 = 12πε 0 R ...(2)<br />

After connection, the common potential V is given by<br />

Q 20πR<br />

σ 5Rσ<br />

V = = =<br />

C 12πε0R<br />

3ε<br />

0<br />

New charge on bigger sphere<br />

Q 2´<br />

= C 2 V<br />

Surface density<br />

2<br />

= 4πε 0 R(2R) × (5Rσ/3ε 0 ) =<br />

40πR<br />

3<br />

2 σ<br />

⎛<br />

2<br />

40 R ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

π σ<br />

⎟<br />

Q ´<br />

σ 2´ = 2<br />

3<br />

=<br />

⎝ ⎠ 5<br />

=<br />

2 σ.<br />

surface area 4π(2R)<br />

6<br />

4. A 8 µF capacitor C 1 is charged to V 0 = 120 volt. The<br />

charging battery is then removed and the capacitor is<br />

connected in parallel to an uncharged 4 µF capacitor<br />

C 2 (a) what is the potential difference V across the<br />

combination (b) What is the stored energy be<strong>for</strong>e<br />

and after the switch S is thrown <br />

S<br />

V 0 C1 C 2<br />

Sol. (a) Let q 0 be the charge on C 1 initially. Then<br />

q 0 = C 1 V 0<br />

when C 1 is connected to C 2 in parallel, the charge q 0<br />

is distributed between C 1 and C 2 . Let q 1 and q 2 be the<br />

charges on C 1 and C 2 respectively. Now let V be the<br />

potential difference across each condenser.<br />

Now q 0 = q 1 + q 2<br />

or C 1 V 0 = C 1 V + C 2 V<br />

C1<br />

8µF<br />

∴ V = V 0 = (120 V)<br />

C + C 8µF + 4µF<br />

1<br />

= 80 volt.<br />

2<br />

(b) Initial energy stored<br />

U 0 = 2<br />

1<br />

C1 V 0<br />

2<br />

= 2<br />

1 (8 × 10 –6 ) (120) 2<br />

= 5.76 × 10 –2 Joule<br />

Final energy stored<br />

U = 2<br />

1<br />

C1 V 2 + 2<br />

1<br />

C2 V 2<br />

= 2<br />

1 (8 × 10 –6 )(80) 2 + 2<br />

1 (4 × 10 –6 )(80) 2<br />

= 3.84 × 10 –2 joule<br />

Final energy is less than the initial energy. The loss<br />

of energy appears as heat in connecting wires.<br />

5. Calculate the capacitance of a parallel plate<br />

condenser, with plate area A and distance between<br />

plates d, when filled with a dielectric whose dielectric<br />

constant varies as<br />

d<br />

ε(x) = ε 0 + βx<br />

0 < x < 2<br />

d<br />

ε(x) = ε 0 + β(d – x) < x < d<br />

2<br />

For what value of β would the capacity of the<br />

condenser be twice that when it is without any<br />

dielectric.<br />

Sol. The capacitance in series is given by<br />

1 1 1 = +<br />

C´ C1<br />

C2<br />

=<br />

∴<br />

1 1 ⎡<br />

⎤<br />

= × ⎢<br />

⎥<br />

C´ A ∫<br />

d / 2 dx d dx<br />

+<br />

⎣<br />

0 ε + β ∫<br />

0 x d / 2 ε0<br />

+ β(d<br />

− x)<br />

⎦<br />

=<br />

1 [{log(ε0 + βx)} d / 2<br />

0 – {log(ε 0 + β(d – x) d / 2<br />

Aβ<br />

d ]<br />

1 ⎡⎧<br />

⎛ d ⎞ ⎫ ⎧ ⎛ d ⎞⎫⎤<br />

⎢⎨log⎜ε<br />

0 + β ⎟ − log ε 0 ⎬ − ⎨log<br />

ε 0 − log⎜ε<br />

0 + β ⎟⎬⎥<br />

Aβ ⎣⎩<br />

⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎭ ⎩ ⎝ 2 ⎠⎭<br />

⎦<br />

2 ⎡ ⎛ d ⎞ ⎤<br />

= ⎢log⎜ε0 + β ⎟ − log ε0<br />

⎥<br />

Aβ<br />

⎣ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎦<br />

2 ⎛ ε<br />

= log<br />

Aβ<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

0 + βd / 2<br />

⎝ ε0<br />

⎠<br />

The capacitance C of a condenser without dielectric<br />

is given by<br />

Aε<br />

C = 0<br />

d<br />

According to the question, C´ = 2C<br />

2 ⎛ ε ⎞<br />

∴ log ⎜<br />

0 + βd / 2 d<br />

⎟<br />

Aε<br />

=<br />

0 ⎝ ε0<br />

⎠ 2ε 0 A<br />

β =<br />

4ε 0<br />

⎛ ε log<br />

d<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜<br />

0 + βd / 2<br />

⎝ ε0<br />

⎠<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 23 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 24 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

Friction<br />

KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY<br />

Friction :<br />

Whenever there is a relative motion between two<br />

surfaces in contact with each other, an opposing <strong>for</strong>ce<br />

comes into play which <strong>for</strong>bids the relative motion of<br />

two bodies. This opposing <strong>for</strong>ce is called the <strong>for</strong>ce of<br />

friction.<br />

Ex. : If a book on a table slides from left to right<br />

along the surface of a table, a frictional <strong>for</strong>ce directed<br />

from right to left acts on the book.<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce may also exist between the surfaces<br />

when there is no relative motion. Frictional <strong>for</strong>ces<br />

arise due to molecular interactions.<br />

Static and Kinetic Friction :<br />

The frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between two surface be<strong>for</strong>e the<br />

relative motion actually starts is called static<br />

frictional <strong>for</strong>ce or static friction, While the<br />

frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between two surfaces in contact and<br />

in relative motion is called kinetic frictional <strong>for</strong>ce or<br />

kinetic friction.<br />

Static friction is a self adjusting <strong>for</strong>ce and it adjusts<br />

both in magnitude and direction automatically. Its<br />

magnitude is always equal to external effective<br />

applied <strong>for</strong>ce, tending to cause the relative motion<br />

and its direction is always opposite to that of external<br />

applied <strong>for</strong>ce.<br />

So, when a body is not in motion or equilibrium, then<br />

Force of static Friction = Applied External Force<br />

Limiting friction, coefficients of friction and angle of<br />

friction :<br />

Consider a block resting on a rough horizontal<br />

surface. The <strong>for</strong>ces acting on the block are its weight<br />

mg downwards and normal reaction N acting upward.<br />

Such that N = mg.<br />

f<br />

R<br />

θ<br />

N<br />

P(


Read the problem Carefully<br />

Find the value of applied<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce F app and limiting <strong>for</strong>ce<br />

of Static Friction (f s )<br />

If F app < f s then body does not<br />

move and the <strong>for</strong>ce of friction<br />

f = F app<br />

if F app > f s<br />

then body moves<br />

If F app = f s the body is on the<br />

verge of motion (still in<br />

equilibrium)<br />

EITHER<br />

with Constant Velocity<br />

OR<br />

with an Acceleration a<br />

F app – f k = 0<br />

or F app = f k<br />

F app – f k = ma<br />

On a Level<br />

Track<br />

On an inclined<br />

Plane<br />

On a Level<br />

Track<br />

On an inclined<br />

Plane<br />

Applied Pull = f k<br />

f k = mg sinθ<br />

F app – µ k mg = ma<br />

or F app = m(a + µ k g)<br />

F app – µ k mg cosθ = ma<br />

or F app = m(a + µ k g cosθ)<br />

Laws of static and kinetic friction :<br />

(a) The <strong>for</strong>ce of limiting friction is directly<br />

proportional to normal reaction <strong>for</strong> the same two<br />

surfaces in contact and acts opposite to direction<br />

of pull.<br />

The kinetic friction is also proportional to<br />

normal reaction and acts opposite to direction of<br />

instantaneous relative motion. The kinetic<br />

friction is less than the static friction.<br />

(b) The <strong>for</strong>ce of limiting (or static) friction is<br />

independent of area of contact of bodies as long<br />

as normal reaction remains the same.<br />

The kinetic friction (to a good approximation) is<br />

independent of velocity, provided the velocity is<br />

neither too large nor too small.<br />

Angle of repose (α)<br />

This is concerned with an inclined plane on which a<br />

block rests, exerting its weight on the plane.<br />

The angle of repose α is the angle which an inclined<br />

plane makes with the horizontal such that a body<br />

placed on it is on the verge of motion (is just about to<br />

loose the state of rest).<br />

Under this condition the <strong>for</strong>ces acting on the block are:<br />

(a) its weight mg, downward,<br />

(b) normal reaction N, normal to plane,<br />

(c) a <strong>for</strong>ce of friction f s , parallel and tangential to<br />

plane upward.<br />

Taking α as angle of inclination of the plane with the<br />

horizontal and resolving mg, parallel and<br />

perpendicular to inclined plane, then <strong>for</strong> equilibrium,<br />

we get<br />

N = mg cos α and f s = mg sin α<br />

⇒ tan α = N<br />

f s<br />

N<br />

mg sinα<br />

Tendency<br />

mg mg cos α<br />

to slide<br />

α<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce on a bicycle in motion :<br />

(a) When a wheel is rotated about its axle without<br />

sliding, the frictional <strong>for</strong>ce acting on it is the<br />

rolling friction and it acts opposite to the direction<br />

of tendency of motion of a points of its contacts<br />

with the ground. In case the wheel rotates<br />

clockwise and frictional <strong>for</strong>ce (f) on wheel is<br />

<strong>for</strong>ward. In case the wheel rotates anticlockwise,<br />

the frictional <strong>for</strong>ce (f) on wheel is backward.<br />

(b) When the bicycle is pedalled, the <strong>for</strong>ce exerted on<br />

the rear wheel through the pedal-chain-axle<br />

system is in backward direction, there<strong>for</strong>e <strong>for</strong>ce of<br />

friction on rear wheel is <strong>for</strong>ward. The front wheel<br />

of cycle moves by itself in <strong>for</strong>ward direction,<br />

hence the <strong>for</strong>ce of friction of front-wheel is in<br />

backward direction.<br />

f s<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 26 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


(c) When the bicycle is not pedalled, no external<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce is being exerted, both wheels move <strong>for</strong>ward<br />

by itself due to inertia and so the net frictional<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce on both wheels is in backward direction.<br />

Solved Examples<br />

1. A block of mass 5 kg is placed on a slope which<br />

makes an angle of 20º with the horizontal and is<br />

given a velocity of 10 m/sec up the slope. Assuming<br />

that the coefficient of sliding friction between the<br />

block and the slope is 0.20, find how far the block<br />

travels up the slope Take g = 10 m/sec 2 .<br />

Sol. This situation is shown in fig.<br />

R u = 10 m/s<br />

mg sin 20º<br />

x<br />

mg<br />

mg cos 20º<br />

20º<br />

The component of the weight perpendicular to plane<br />

= mg cos 20º = 5 × 10 × 0.9397 = 46.98 N<br />

The component of the weight parallel to the plane<br />

= mg sin 20º = 5 × 10 × 0.3420 = 17.10 N<br />

From figure R = mg cos 20º = 46.98 N<br />

Here the coefficient of kinetic friction = 0.2<br />

Thus the frictional <strong>for</strong>ce X = 0.2 × 46.98 = 9.39 N<br />

The frictional <strong>for</strong>ce will be downward because the<br />

motion is in the upward direction.<br />

The resultant <strong>for</strong>ce parallel to the plane is given by<br />

= X + mg sin 20º = 9.39 + 17.10 = 26.49 N<br />

From Newton's law F = ma, i.e., 26.49 = 5 × a<br />

26.49<br />

∴ a = = 5.29 m/s 2 downward<br />

5<br />

When the block is given a velocity 10 m/s in the<br />

upward direction we have<br />

u = 10 m/s, v = 0, a = – 5.9 m/s 2 .<br />

(Taking the direction up the plane as positive)<br />

Let s be the distance traveled by the block.<br />

Using the <strong>for</strong>mula v 2 = u 2 + 2a s, we have<br />

0 = (10) 2 – 2 × 5.29 × s<br />

100<br />

or s = = 9.45 m.<br />

2×<br />

5.29<br />

2. A block is projected up with 10 m/s along a fixed<br />

inclined plane of inclination 37º with the horizontal.<br />

If the time of ascend from the point of projection is<br />

half the time of descend to the same point, find the<br />

distance travelled by the block during the up and<br />

down journey.<br />

Sol. Let µ, t 1 and t 2 be the coefficient of friction between<br />

the plane and the block, time of ascend and time of<br />

descend respectively.<br />

The retardation while going up<br />

⎛ 3 4 ⎞<br />

a 1 = g (sin θ + µ cos θ) = 10 ⎜ + µ ⎟<br />

⎝ 5 5 ⎠<br />

The acceleration while descending<br />

⎛ 3 4 ⎞<br />

a 2 = g(sin θ – µ cos θ) = 10 ⎜ −µ<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ 5 5 ⎠<br />

Now, s = distance of ascend = distance of descend.<br />

As final velocity is zero, we have<br />

0 = u – a 1 t 1 or u = a 1 t 1<br />

Now s = a 1 t 1 2 – 2<br />

1<br />

a1 t 1 2 = 2<br />

1<br />

a1 t 1<br />

2<br />

s = a 1 t 1 2 = 2<br />

1<br />

a2 t 2 2 and t 2 = 2t 1<br />

⎛ 3 4 ⎞<br />

⎛<br />

2<br />

2 ⎜ −µ<br />

⎟<br />

⎞<br />

∴ ⎜<br />

a ⎛<br />

⎟<br />

t1<br />

⎞<br />

=<br />

⎝ a<br />

⎜<br />

1 ⎠ t<br />

⎟ or<br />

⎝ 5 5 ⎠ ⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

= ⎜ ⎟⎠<br />

⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

⎛ 3 4 ⎞ 2<br />

⎜ + µ<br />

⎝<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ 5 5 ⎠<br />

Solving we get µ = (9/20)<br />

⎛ 3 9 4 ⎞<br />

Again a 1 = 10 ⎜ + × ⎟ = 9.6 m/sec 2<br />

⎝ 5 20 5 ⎠<br />

2<br />

2<br />

u (10)<br />

∴ s = = = 5.21 meter<br />

2a1<br />

2×<br />

9.6<br />

So total distance = 2s = 10.42 metre<br />

3. A block weighing 20 nt is at rest on a horizontal<br />

table. The coefficient of static friction between block<br />

and table is 0.50. (a) What is the magnitude of the<br />

horizontal <strong>for</strong>ce that will just start the block moving <br />

(b) What is the magnitude of a <strong>for</strong>ce acting upward<br />

60º from the horizontal that will just start the block<br />

moving (c) If the <strong>for</strong>ce acts down at 60º from the<br />

horizontal how large can it be without causing the<br />

block to move <br />

Sol. (a) As shown in fig. the horizontal <strong>for</strong>ce F that will<br />

just start the block moving is equal to the maximum<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce of static friction. Thus,<br />

R<br />

µR<br />

W<br />

F = µR = µW = 0.50 × 20 nt. = 10.0 nt.<br />

(b) The <strong>for</strong>ces acting on the block are shown in fig.<br />

R<br />

F sin θ<br />

F<br />

µR<br />

W<br />

The applied <strong>for</strong>ce is inclined at an angle θ in the<br />

upward direction. Its horizontal and vertical<br />

F<br />

θ<br />

Fcos θ<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 27 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


components are F cos θ and F sin θ respectively. In<br />

equilibrium.<br />

F cos θ = µR and F sin θ + R = W<br />

or R = (W – F sin θ)<br />

∴ F cos θ = µ(W – F sin θ) = µ W – µF sin θ<br />

F (cos θ + µ sin θ) = µW<br />

µW<br />

or F =<br />

cosθ<br />

+ µ sin θ<br />

Here µ = 0.50, W = 20 nt. and θ = 60º<br />

0.50×<br />

20<br />

10<br />

F =<br />

=<br />

cos60º + 0.5sin 60º<br />

= 10.72 nt.<br />

(c) In this case,<br />

µR<br />

R<br />

Fcos θ<br />

θ<br />

F<br />

0.50 + 0.5×<br />

0.866<br />

F sin θ<br />

W<br />

F cos θ = µR and R = W + F sin θ<br />

Solving we get,<br />

µW<br />

0.50×<br />

20<br />

F =<br />

=<br />

cosθ<br />

−µ<br />

sin θ 0.50 − 0.5×<br />

0.866<br />

= 149.2 nt.<br />

4. Two blocks, m 1 = 2kg and m 2 = 4kg, are connected<br />

with a light string that runs over a frictionless peg to<br />

a hanging block with a mass M as shown in fig. (a).<br />

The coefficient of sliding friction between block m 2<br />

and the horizontal surface at the speeds involved is<br />

µ k = 0.2. The coefficient of static friction between the<br />

two blocks is µ S = 0.4. What is the maximum mass M<br />

<strong>for</strong> the hanging block if the block m 1 is not to slip on<br />

block m 2 while m 2 is sliding over the surface <br />

Sol. The relevant free body diagrams are shown in fig.(b)<br />

Using two body system, we have<br />

N T<br />

m s = 0.4 N 1<br />

+<br />

m 1<br />

m 2<br />

T<br />

f 1 f<br />

µ k = 0.2<br />

m 1 g (m 1 +m 2 )g<br />

a<br />

Mg<br />

(a) M<br />

(b)<br />

N – (m 1 + m 2 )g = 0 ...(1)<br />

T – F = (m 1 + m 2 )a ...(2)<br />

For hanging block<br />

Mg – T = Ma ...(3)<br />

From eqs. (2) and (3),<br />

Mg – f = (M + m 1 + m 2 )a<br />

But f = µ k N = µ k (m 1 + m 2 )g [Q using eq. (1)]<br />

∴ Mg – µ k (m 1 + m 2 )g = (m + m 1 + m 2 )a<br />

{M −µ<br />

k (m1<br />

+ m2<br />

)}g<br />

or a =<br />

(M + m + m )<br />

1<br />

2<br />

...(4)<br />

From free body diagram of mass m 1 , we have<br />

N 1 – m 1 g = 0 and f 1 = m 1 a<br />

It should be noticed that the <strong>for</strong>ce f 1 accelerates m 1 to<br />

the right. Just be<strong>for</strong>e slipping occurs, we find<br />

f1<br />

m1 a a<br />

= µ S or µ S = =<br />

N<br />

m g g<br />

1<br />

{M −µ<br />

k (m1<br />

+ m2<br />

)}<br />

∴ µ S =<br />

(M + m1<br />

+ m2<br />

)<br />

Solving eq. (5) <strong>for</strong> M, we have<br />

(µ S + µ k (m1<br />

+ m2<br />

)<br />

M =<br />

1−µ<br />

(0.4 + 0.2)(2kg + 4kg)<br />

or M =<br />

= 6 kg.<br />

(1 − 0.4)<br />

S<br />

1<br />

....(5)<br />

5. In fig.(a) the blocks A, B and C weight are 3kg, 4kg<br />

and 8kg respectively. The coefficient of sliding<br />

friction between any two surfaces is 0.25. A is held at<br />

rest by a massless rigid rod fixed to the wall, while B<br />

and C are connected by a light flexible cord passing<br />

around a fixed frictionless pulley. Find the <strong>for</strong>ce P<br />

necessary to drag C along the horizontal surface to<br />

the left at a constant speed. Assume that the<br />

arrangement shown in the diagram, B on C and A on<br />

B is maintained all the throughout.<br />

P<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

Sol. When block C moves towards left, B moves towards<br />

right, while A is fixed. There would be a tension T in<br />

the string. Under this condition, let us consider the<br />

frictional <strong>for</strong>ces between different surfaces.<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between A and B<br />

= µR = 0.25 × 3<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between C and B<br />

= µR = 0.25 (3 + 4) = 0.25 × 7<br />

Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between C and surface<br />

= 0.25(3 + 4 + 8) = 0.25 × 15<br />

Considering fig. (b)<br />

0.25 × 3<br />

0.25(3 + 4)<br />

B<br />

0.25(3 + 4)<br />

T P<br />

C<br />

T<br />

0.25 × 15<br />

Fig (b)<br />

Tension in the string = Frictional <strong>for</strong>ces at upper and<br />

lower surfaces of block B<br />

or T = 0.25 × 3 + 0.25 × 7 = 2.5 kg wt.<br />

For block C,<br />

P = T + Frictional <strong>for</strong>ce between C and B + Frictional<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce between C and surface<br />

= 2.5 + 0.25 × (3 + 4) + 0.25 × (15) = 8 kg wt.<br />

= 8 × 9.8 = 78.4 newton<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 28 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


KEY CONCEPT<br />

Organic<br />

Chemistry<br />

Fundamentals<br />

REACTION<br />

MECHANISM<br />

Elimination reactions :<br />

The elimination reactions are reverse of addition<br />

reactions. In these reactions two atoms or group<br />

attached to the adjacent carbon atoms of the substrate<br />

molecule are eliminated to <strong>for</strong>m a multiple bond. In<br />

these reactions a atom or group from α-carbon atom<br />

and a proton from the β-carbon are eliminated.<br />

X<br />

β<br />

α<br />

– C – C – –HX – C = C –<br />

H<br />

In eliminations reactions, the presence of one<br />

hydrogen on the β-carbon atom is necessary. In<br />

general the elimination reactions are divided into two<br />

types, i.e., bimolecular elimination reactions (E 2 ) and<br />

unimolecular elimination reactions (E 1 ).<br />

Bimolecular elimination reactions (E 2 ) :<br />

In these elimination reactions, the rate of elimination<br />

depends on the concentration of the substrate and the<br />

nucleophile and the reaction is of second order. It is<br />

represented as E2. Like S N 2 reaction, the E2 reaction<br />

is also one step process. In these reactions abstraction<br />

of proton from the β-carbon atom and the expulsion<br />

of an atom or group from the α-carbon atom occur<br />

simultaneously. The mechanism of this reaction is<br />

represented as follows:<br />

δ+<br />

B: H<br />

B H<br />

R – CH – CH 2 R — CH — CH 2<br />

β α<br />

X<br />

X<br />

δ –<br />

Transition state<br />

⊕ Θ<br />

RCH = CH 2 + BH + X<br />

The above reaction is a one step process and passes<br />

through a transition state. This reaction is also known<br />

as 1, 2-elimination or simply β-elimination. In these<br />

reactions, the two groups to be eliminated (i.e., H and<br />

X) are trans to each other and hence E2 reactions are<br />

generally trans elimination.<br />

The second-order elimination reaction may also<br />

proceed in two steps (as in E1 elimination which will<br />

be discussed subsequently). In this mechanism, the<br />

base removes the hydrogen in the first step to <strong>for</strong>m an<br />

intermediate carbanion. In the second step, the<br />

intermediate carbanion looses the leaving group. The<br />

second step is slow and is rate determining step.<br />

H<br />

–<br />

– C – C – + OEt<br />

Fast<br />

Θ<br />

– C – C –<br />

(First step)<br />

Br<br />

Br<br />

Θ<br />

– C – C – Slow – C = C – + Br – (Second step)<br />

Br<br />

The rate of this reaction is dependent on the<br />

carbanion (conjugate base of the substrate). So this<br />

mechanism is called ElcB mechanism (Elimination,<br />

Unimolecular from conjugate base).<br />

E1cB mechanism is not common <strong>for</strong> the E2 reactions.<br />

The carbanion mechanism occurs only where the<br />

carbanion from the substrate is stabilized and where<br />

the leaving group is a poor leaving group. A typical<br />

example, which follows E1cB mechanism is the<br />

<strong>for</strong>mation of 1,1-dichloro-2,2-difluoroethene from<br />

1,1-dichloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane in presence of<br />

sodium ethoxide.<br />

C 2 H 5 ONa –<br />

CHCl 2 – CF 3<br />

Cl 2 C – CF –F– 3 Cl 2 C = CF 2<br />

1,1-Dichloro-2,2,2-<br />

trifluoroethane<br />

Carbanion<br />

1,1-Dichloro-2,2-<br />

difluoroethane<br />

In the above case the carbanion is strongly stabilized<br />

due to –I effect of halogens. Also F – is a poor leaving<br />

group.<br />

A distinction between the E2 and E1cB mechanism<br />

can be made by tracer experiments. Thus, the<br />

reaction of 1-bromo-2-phenylethane (this substrate<br />

was selected as Ph group is expected to increase the<br />

acidity of β-hydrogen and also to stabilize the<br />

carbanion) with C 2 H 5 OD gives back the starting 1-<br />

bromo-2-phenylethane. If the carbanion mechanism<br />

had operated, the deuterium would have been found<br />

in the recovered 1-bromo-2-phenylethane, which is<br />

not the case.<br />

C 6 H 5 CH 2 CH 2 Br + C 2 H 5 O –<br />

1-Bromo-2-phenylethane<br />

C 6 H 5 CHCH 2 Br + C 2 H 5 OH<br />

C 6 H 5 CHCH 2 Br + C 2 H 5 OD<br />

C 6 H 5 CHCH 2 Br + OC 2 H 5<br />

In case the above reaction is allowed to go to<br />

completion, the product obtained will be<br />

D<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 29 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


EtO –<br />

H<br />

PhCH – CH 2 Br<br />

Fast<br />

C 2H 5OD<br />

PhCD = CH 2 + Br<br />

–<br />

Ph – CH – CH 2 Br<br />

D<br />

Ph – CH – CH 2 Br<br />

OEt<br />

PhCD – CH 2 Br<br />

Styrene<br />

The styrene obtained does not contain any deuterium<br />

(contrary to what has been shown in the above E1cB<br />

mechanism). So in the above reaction E2 mechanism<br />

operates.<br />

The E2 mechanism is supported by the following<br />

evidences.<br />

(i) During elimination, there is no rearranged product<br />

obtained. This is due to the fact that E2 is a single<br />

step process and does not involve the <strong>for</strong>mation of<br />

intermediate carbocation (the carbocations are known<br />

to undergo rearrangement).<br />

(ii) The E2 mechanism finds support from isotope<br />

labeling experiments. Dehydrohalogenation of<br />

unlabelled 1-bromopropane is seven times faster than<br />

the dehydrohalogenation of CH 3 CD 2 CH 2 Br.<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 Br ⎯⎯→<br />

E2<br />

CH 3 CH = CH 2<br />

Br<br />

CH 3 CD – CH 2<br />

E2 CH 3 CD = CH 2<br />

D<br />

In E2 mechanism a hydrogen (from CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 Br)<br />

or a deuterium (from CH 3 CD 2 CH 2 Br) has to be<br />

abstracted. It is known that the C – D bond is<br />

stronger than the C – H bond and requires more<br />

energy to be broken. There<strong>for</strong>e, rate of elimination in<br />

CH 3 CD 2 CH 2 Br should be slower. In fact, it has been<br />

found that in the unlabelled alkyl halides the<br />

elimination rate is seven times more than in labelled<br />

alkyl halides.<br />

Unsymmetrical substrate which has hydrogen<br />

attached to two different β-carbons can af<strong>for</strong>ed two<br />

alkenes. For example, 2-bromobutane on<br />

dehydrohalogenation may give 1-butene or 2-butene.<br />

Br<br />

CH 3 – CHCH 2 CH 3<br />

2-Bromobutane<br />

–HBr<br />

CH 2 = CHCH 2 CH 3 + CH 3 CH=CHCH 3<br />

1-Butene 2-Butene<br />

In a similar way, decomposition of sec-butyltrimethylammonium<br />

hydroxide may give a mixture<br />

of two alkenes. The question arises as to which<br />

alkene will be obtained in major amount in the above<br />

dehydrohalogenation. The orientation of the reaction<br />

is determined by Hafmann and Saytzeff Rule.<br />

Hofmann Rule : This rule is applicable <strong>for</strong> those<br />

substrates in which α-carbon atom is attached to a<br />

positively charged atom. According to this rule, in<br />

the elimination reaction of positively charged species,<br />

the major product will be the alkene which is least<br />

substituted.<br />

CH 3 OH<br />

–<br />

+ Heating<br />

CH 3 CH 2 NCH 2 CH 2 CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 2 = CH 2 + CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 N(CH 3 ) 2<br />

+<br />

CH 3 CH 2 S(CH 3 ) 2<br />

–<br />

C 2H 5O<br />

CH 2 = CH 2 + S(CH 3 ) 2<br />

Saytzeff Rule : In case of unsymmetrical alkyl<br />

halides, <strong>for</strong> example in 2-bromobutane, the course of<br />

elimination is determined by Saytzeff Rule.<br />

According to this rule, hydrogen is eliminated<br />

preferentially from the carbon atom which has less<br />

number of hydrogen atoms and so the highly<br />

substituted alkene is the major product.<br />

Br<br />

alk.KOH<br />

CH 3 CH 2 – CH – CH 3<br />

2-Bromobutane<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3 CH 2 – C – CH 3<br />

Br<br />

2-Bromo-2-methylbutane<br />

CH 3 CH = CHCH 3 + CH 3 CH 2 CH = CH 2<br />

2-Butene(80%) 1-Butene (20%)<br />

C 2H 5O –<br />

CH 3 CH 3<br />

CH 3 CH = C – CH 3 + CH 3 CH 2 C = CH 2<br />

2-methyl-2-butene 2-methyl-1-butene<br />

(71%)<br />

(29%)<br />

The <strong>for</strong>mation of highly substituted alkene can be<br />

explained as follows.<br />

The transition states of less substituted and more<br />

substituted alkenes from an alkyl halide are<br />

represented as shown below:<br />

H<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CH — CH 2<br />

δ–<br />

OR<br />

Br<br />

δ–<br />

T.S. of less substituted alkene<br />

δ–<br />

RO<br />

H<br />

CH 3 CH — CHCH 3<br />

Br<br />

δ–<br />

T.S. of more substituted alkene<br />

Both the transition states have partial double bond<br />

character. However, the transition state leading to<br />

more stable alkene is more stabilized and is of lower<br />

energy. Thus, the more stable alkene is <strong>for</strong>med as the<br />

major product.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 30 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


E<br />

RX + base<br />

less substitued alkene<br />

more substitued alkene<br />

predominant product<br />

Reaction progress<br />

Energy diagram <strong>for</strong> a typical E2 reaction, showing<br />

why the more substituted alkene predominates<br />

Hofmann rule can be understood by considering the<br />

mechanism of elimination reaction of quaternary<br />

ammonium hydroxide.<br />

H CH 3<br />

β´ β´´<br />

+<br />

H – C – CH 2 – N – CH 2 CH 2 CH 3<br />

H CH 3<br />

B – Route a<br />

CH 2 = CH 2 + (CH 3 ) 2 N(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3<br />

Another possibility is :<br />

CH 3 H<br />

β´<br />

+<br />

β´´<br />

CH 3 CH 2 – N – CH 2 – C – CH 3<br />

CH 3 H B –<br />

Route b<br />

(CH 3 ) 2 NCH 2 CH 3 + CH 3 CH = CH 2<br />

In the above reaction the strong electron-withdrawing<br />

group makes the hydrogens of the β-carbons more<br />

acidic <strong>for</strong> facile abstraction by the base. In this<br />

compound, with alternate β-hydrogens (marked β´<br />

and β´´), the β" hydrogen are less acidic due to +I<br />

effect of the adjacent methyl group. Hence β´hydrogen<br />

is relatively more acidic and is removed to<br />

give the alkene (ethene) by route a.<br />

In elimination reactions steric effect also plays an<br />

important role. Thus, dehydrohalogenation of alkyl<br />

halide using the bulky base leads to the <strong>for</strong>mation of<br />

terminal alkene as the major product.<br />

Br<br />

–<br />

t-BuO<br />

CH 3 CH 2 CHCH 3<br />

2-Bromobutane CH 3 CH 2 CH=CH 2 + CH 3 CH=CHCH 3<br />

(73%) (27%)<br />

Unimolecular elimination reactions (E1) :<br />

In these reactions the rate of elimination is dependent<br />

only on the concentration of the substrate and is<br />

independent of the concentration of the nucleophile<br />

and the reaction is of first order, (E1). Like S N 1<br />

reaction the E1 reaction is also a two step process.<br />

The first step is the slow ionization of alkyl halide to<br />

give the carbocation. The second step involves the<br />

fast abstraction of a proton from the adjacent<br />

β-carbon atom giving rise to the <strong>for</strong>mation of an<br />

alkene.<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3 — C — X<br />

CH 3<br />

Slow<br />

CH 3 CH 2 – H<br />

Fast<br />

C :B –<br />

CH 3<br />

Carbocation<br />

CH 3 +<br />

CH 3 — C + X –<br />

CH 3<br />

Carbocation<br />

CH 3 C = CH 2 + BH<br />

CH 3<br />

2-Methylpropene<br />

In case the substrate is such that more than one<br />

alkenes can be <strong>for</strong>med, that alkene will predominate<br />

which has larger number of alkyl groups on the<br />

double bonded carbon (this is as per Saytzeffs rule.<br />

This can be visualised since the substituted alkyl<br />

groups will stabilise the alkene by hyperconjugation.<br />

CH 3 Br<br />

CH 3<br />

–HBr<br />

CH 3 — C — C — CH 3 CH 3 — C == C — CH 3<br />

H<br />

H<br />

2-Bromo-3-methylbutane<br />

CH 3<br />

H<br />

2-Methyl-2-butene (major)<br />

+ CH 3 — CH — CH == CH 2<br />

3-Methyl-1-butene (minor)<br />

The acid catalysed dehydration of alcohols also<br />

follows E1 mechanism.<br />

⊕<br />

(CH 3 ) 3 COH H2SO4 –H<br />

(CH 3 ) 3 C—OH 2O<br />

2 (CH3 ) 3 C ⊕<br />

t-Butyl alcohol<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

⊕<br />

H 3 C — C<br />

CH 3 — C == CH 2<br />

2-Methylpropene<br />

CH 2 – H<br />

In the E1 mechanism the rate of reaction is<br />

determined by the rate of <strong>for</strong>mation of carbocation,<br />

which in turn depends on the stability of carbocation.<br />

Due to the <strong>for</strong>mation of carbocation, these may<br />

undergo rearrangements. This has been<br />

experimentally confirmed.<br />

Br<br />

(CH 3 ) 3 CCHCH 3<br />

C 2H 5OH<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(CH 3 ) 3 CCH = CH 2 + CH .3 C = CCH 3<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 31 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


KEY CONCEPT<br />

Physical<br />

Chemistry<br />

Fundamentals<br />

ENERGETICS<br />

Thermodynamics deals with the transfer of heat<br />

between a chemical system and its surroundings<br />

when a reaction or phase change takes place within<br />

the system. The entire <strong>for</strong>mulation of<br />

thermodynamics is based on two fundamental laws<br />

which have been established on the basis of<br />

experimental on the basis of experimental behaviour<br />

of macroscopic aggregates of matter, collected over a<br />

long period of time.<br />

Since<br />

First Law of thermodynamics<br />

The internal energy of a system can be changed by<br />

transferring heat to/from the system from/to the<br />

surroundings. It can also be changed by doing the<br />

mechanical work on/by the system by/on the<br />

surroundings. These facts are represented in the <strong>for</strong>m<br />

of the first law of thermodynamics as<br />

dU = dq + dw or ∆U = q + w<br />

Since heat given to the system and work done on the<br />

system raise the internal energy of the system, these<br />

two operations are assigned positive values. The<br />

converse of the two operations, viz., heat given out<br />

and work done by the system are assigned negative<br />

values.<br />

The expression of work done by/on a gaseous system<br />

is given by<br />

dw = – p ext dV<br />

Where p ext is the external pressure against which the<br />

volume gaseous system is changed by an amount dV.<br />

For a constant external pressure, we have<br />

w = – nRT ln (V 2 /V 1 )<br />

where V 1 and V 2 are the initial and final volumes of<br />

the gaseous system.<br />

If p ext differs from the pressure of the gas by<br />

infinitesimal amount, the work is said to be carried<br />

out under reversible condition. In this case, the<br />

expression of work under constant temperature<br />

condition is given by<br />

w = – nRT ln (V 2 /V 1 ) '<br />

Note that <strong>for</strong> V 2 > V 1 , there occurs an expansion of<br />

the gas. The work is done by the system on the<br />

surroundings and it carries a negative sign.<br />

For V 1 > V 2 , there occurs compression of the gaseous<br />

system. The work is done by the surroundings on the<br />

system and it carries a positive sign.<br />

Internal energy and enthalpy<br />

From the first law of thermodynamics, it can be<br />

shown that the heat transferred at constant volume<br />

changes the internal energy of the system, whereas<br />

that at constant pressure changes the enthalpy of the<br />

system .<br />

∆U = nC v , m (T 2 – T 1 ) ; and ∆H = nC p, m (T 2 – T 1 )<br />

where C v,m and C p,m are the molar heat capacities at<br />

constant volume and constant pressure, respectively.<br />

In the laboratory, the majority of chemical reactions<br />

are carried out under the condition of constant<br />

pressure, and thus the heat transferred in such a<br />

system is equal to the enthalpy change in a chemical<br />

reaction. Since the enthalpy of a system can also<br />

change due to the variation in temperature and<br />

pressure, it is, there<strong>for</strong>e essential that the reactants<br />

and products in a chemical reaction must have the<br />

same temperature and pressure.<br />

Enthalpy change of a chemical equation<br />

The enthalpy change of thermochemical equation is<br />

∆H = ∑ v jH m, j – ∑ v iH m,i<br />

(products)<br />

(reactan ts)<br />

where H m,i refers to the molar enthalpy of species i in<br />

the balanced chemical equation and v i the<br />

corresponding stoichiometric coefficient. The unit of<br />

∆H are kJ mol –1 .<br />

Two types of reactions may be distinguished.<br />

(a) Exothermic reactions For these ∆H is negative,<br />

which implies negative q p and hence release of heat<br />

when reactants are converted into products. In this<br />

case<br />

ΣH(products) < ΣH(reactants)<br />

(b) Endothermic reactions For these ∆H is is positive,<br />

which implies positive q p and hence absorption of<br />

heat when reactants are converted into products. In<br />

this case<br />

ΣH(products) > ΣH(reactants)<br />

Molar enthalpies of <strong>for</strong>mations<br />

It is not possible to determine the absolute value of<br />

enthalpy of a substance. However, based on the<br />

following convention, the relative values of standard<br />

molar enthalpies of <strong>for</strong>mation (the term standard<br />

indicates of pressure of 1 bar) other substances can be<br />

determined.<br />

The enthalpy of <strong>for</strong>mation of every element in its<br />

stable states of aggregation at 1 bar and 25ºC is<br />

assigned a zero value.<br />

For example, ∆ f Hº (graphite) = 0 ∆ f Hº (Br 2 , 1) = 0<br />

∆ f Hº (S, rhombic) = 0 ∆ f Hº (H 2 , g) = 0 and so on.]<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 32 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 33 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 34 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 35 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 36 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


The enthalpy change of a chemical equation can be<br />

computed by using the expression<br />

0<br />

0<br />

∆ r Hº = ∆ f Hi<br />

– ∑ ∆f<br />

Hi<br />

∑<br />

( products) (reactors)<br />

Hess's law of constant heat summation<br />

Since the molar enthalpies of <strong>for</strong>mation of reactants<br />

and products involved in a chemical equation have<br />

definite values, the enthalpy change of (or heat<br />

involved in) the chemical equation will have a<br />

definite value, irrespective of the fact whether the<br />

reaction is carried out in one step or more than one<br />

step. This fact is known as Hess's law of constant<br />

heat summation. For example,<br />

(i) C(graphite) + O 2 ((g) → CO 2 (g)<br />

∆H 1 = – 393.51 kJ mol –1<br />

(ii) C(graphite) + 2<br />

1<br />

O2 (g) → CO(g)<br />

CO(g) + 2<br />

1<br />

O2 (g) → CO 2 (g)<br />

∆H 2 = – 110.52 kJ mol –1<br />

∆H 3 = – 282.99 kJ mol –1<br />

Obviously, ∆H 1 = ∆H 2 + ∆H 3<br />

Types of reactions and corresponding enthalpy changes<br />

The enthalpy change in a reaction is suitable named<br />

according to the type of reaction in question. Two<br />

types of reaction are specifically defined as follows.<br />

Enthalpy of <strong>for</strong>mation: the enthalpy of combustion<br />

of a given substance is defined as the enthalpy<br />

change when 1 mole of a given substance is <strong>for</strong>med,<br />

starting from the elements in their stable states of<br />

aggregation. A few examples are<br />

H 2 (g) + 2<br />

1<br />

O2 (g) → H 2 O(1)<br />

∆ f Hº(H 2 O, 1) = – 285.77 kJ mol –1<br />

11<br />

12C(graphite) + 11H 2 (g) + O2 (g) → C 12 H 22 O 11 (s)<br />

2<br />

∆ f Hº(C 12 H 22 O 11 ,s) = –2218 kJ mol –1<br />

Enthalpy of Combustion: The enthalpy of<br />

combustion of a given substance is defined as the<br />

enthalpy change when one mole of this substance<br />

combines with requisite amount of oxygen to <strong>for</strong>m<br />

products in their stable states of aggregation. A few<br />

examples are<br />

CH 4 (g) + 2O 2 (g) → CO 2 (g) + 2H 2 O(l)<br />

∆ c H(CH 4 , g) = –74.85 kJ mol –1<br />

C 12 H 22 O 11 (s) + 12O 2 (g) → 12CO 2 (g) + 11H 2 O(l)<br />

∆ c H(C 12 H 22 O 11 , s) = – 5644 kJ mol –1<br />

Similarly, one can mane the enthalpy change based<br />

on the type of reaction. A few examples are<br />

Enthalpy of fusion: H 2 O(s) ⎯ 273<br />

⎯ .15<br />

⎯<br />

K<br />

→ H 2 O(l)<br />

Enthalpy of vaporization :<br />

∆ fus H = 6 kJ mol –1<br />

H 2 O(1 ) ⎯ 373<br />

⎯ .15<br />

⎯<br />

K<br />

→ H 2 O(g)<br />

∆ vap H = 40.6 kJ mol –1<br />

Enthalpy of sublimation : I 2 (s) → I 2 (g)<br />

∆ sub H = 63.4 kJ mol –1<br />

Enthalpy of transition : C(graphite) → C(diamond)<br />

∆ trs H = 1.90 kJ mol –1<br />

Enthalpy of neutralization : H + (aq)+OH – (aq)→H 2 O(l)<br />

∆ neut H = – 57.3 kJ mol –1<br />

Enthalpy of ionization : HCN(aq) → H + (aq)+CN – (aq)<br />

∆ ioniz H = 45.17 kJ mol –1<br />

Relation between ∆H and ∆U of a chemical equation<br />

Since, H = U + pV, we have<br />

∆H = ∆U + ∆(pV) = ∆U + (∆v g ) RT<br />

where ∆v g is the change in the stoichiometric number<br />

of gaseous molecules in converting reactants to<br />

products and is given as<br />

∆v g = v – ∑ v g,i<br />

∑ g,i<br />

(products)<br />

(reac tan ts)<br />

rFor a reaction involving condensed phases<br />

∆H – ~ ∆U<br />

Bond Enthalpies: Bond enthalpy of a given bond is<br />

defined as the average enthalpies required to<br />

dissociate the said bond present in different gaseous<br />

compounds into free atoms in the gaseous phase. The<br />

bond enthalpy may be distinguished from bond<br />

dissociation enthalpy which is enthalpy required to<br />

dissociate a given bond of some specific molecule. It<br />

is possible to construct a table listing the average<br />

bond enthalpies of different types of bonds and with<br />

the help of this, one can estimate the enthalpy change<br />

of a chemical equation involving gaseous species.<br />

For example, <strong>for</strong> a reaction<br />

H 2 (g) + Cl 2 (g) → 2HCl(g)<br />

we can write ∆H = + ε(H–H) + ε(Cl–Cl) –2ε(H–Cl)<br />

Second Law of thermodynamics<br />

The second law of thermodynamics identifies a state<br />

function, called the entropy, which provides a<br />

criterion <strong>for</strong> identifying reversible or irreversible<br />

nature of the given process undergone by a system.<br />

The entropy of the universe (system + surroundings)<br />

increases <strong>for</strong> irreversible processes whereas it<br />

remains constant <strong>for</strong> reversible processes.<br />

The entropy function has been identified with the<br />

disorderliness of the system–larger the disorderliness,<br />

larger the entropy of the system. Foe example, <strong>for</strong> a<br />

substance in three states of matter we have<br />

S(gaseous state) > > S(liquid state) > (solid state)<br />

Expression of Entropy Function<br />

For a system which involves transferring<br />

infinitesimal heat at constant temperature, the entropy<br />

change of the system is given by<br />

dS =<br />

dq rev<br />

T<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 37 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


For finite heat transferred at constant temperature, we<br />

have<br />

q<br />

∆S = rev<br />

T<br />

For example, <strong>for</strong> a pure substance we have<br />

∆ vapH<br />

∆fusH<br />

∆ vap S = and ∆ fus S =<br />

Tb<br />

Tm<br />

where the subscripts vap and fus represent<br />

vaporization and fusion, respectively.<br />

Gibbs Function<br />

Gibbs function (or energy) or simply free energy is<br />

defined as<br />

G = H – TS<br />

For a process occurring at constant T and P, the<br />

change in Gibbs function is given by<br />

∆G = ∆H – T ∆S<br />

For a process to be spontaneous, the value of ∆G is<br />

negative. For a nonspontaneous reaction, ∆G is<br />

positive. For a reaction at equilibrium, ∆G = 0 and<br />

temperature at which the system occurs at<br />

equilibrium is given by<br />

T eq = ∆H/∆S<br />

Pressure-Volume Work<br />

An ideal gas can undergo expansion of compression<br />

under isothermal or adiabatic conditions. The<br />

expansion ant compression may be carried out under<br />

reversible or irreversible conditions. We give below<br />

the expressions of p-V work under different<br />

conditions.<br />

Isothermal p–V Work<br />

In this case, temperature of the system remains<br />

constant, ie. ∆T = 0<br />

For irreversible condition: w = – P ext (V 2 – V 1 )<br />

For reversible condition: w = – nRT In (V 2 /V 1 )<br />

Adiabatic p–V Work<br />

In this case, heat can neither enter to or leave from<br />

the system, i.e. q = 0. From first law of<br />

thermodynamics, it follows that<br />

∆U = w<br />

where ∆U is given by<br />

∆U = C v (T 2 – T 1 )<br />

For a gas undergoing adiabatic irreversible volume<br />

change, the expression of work is given by<br />

w = – P ext (V 2 –V 1 )<br />

For an ideal gas undergoing adiabatic reversible<br />

expansion/compression, we also have<br />

pV γ = constant<br />

pT γ(1–γ) = constant<br />

and TV γ–1 = constant<br />

here γ = C p,m /C v,m The symbols C p,m and C v,m represent<br />

molar heat capacities at constant pressure and volume<br />

conditions, respectively.<br />

For a monatomic ideal gas:<br />

C v,m = (3/2)R; C p,m = (5/2)R; and γ = 5/3<br />

For a diatomic ideal gas:<br />

C v,m = (5/2)R; C p,m = (7/2)R; and γ = 7/5<br />

CHEMISTRY JOKES<br />

If you didn't get the joke, you probably didn't<br />

understand the science behind it. If this is the case,<br />

it's a chance <strong>for</strong> you to learn a little chemistry.<br />

Chemistry Joke 1:<br />

Outside his buckyball home, one molecule overheard<br />

another molecule saying, "I'm positive that a free<br />

electron once stripped me of an electron after he<br />

lepton me. You gotta keep your ion them."<br />

Chemistry Joke 2:<br />

A chemistry professor couldn't resist interjecting a<br />

little philosophy into a class lecture. He interrupted<br />

his discussion on balancing chemical equations,<br />

saying, "Remember, if you're not part of the solution,<br />

you're part of the precipitate!"<br />

Chemistry Joke 3:<br />

One day on the Tonight Show, Jay Leno showed a<br />

classified add that read: "Do you have mole<br />

problems If so, call Avogadro at 602-1023."<br />

Chemistry Joke 4:<br />

A student comes into his lab class right at the end of<br />

the hour. Fearing he'll get an "F", he asks a fellow<br />

student what she's been doing. "We've been<br />

observing water under the microscope. We're<br />

suppose to write up what we see." The page of her<br />

notebook is filled with little figures resembling circles<br />

and ellipses with hair on them. The panic-stricken<br />

student hears the bell go off, opens his notebook and<br />

writes, "During this laboratory, I examined water<br />

under the microscope and I saw twice as many H's as<br />

O's."<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 38 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


U n d e r s t a n d i n g<br />

UNDERSTANDING<br />

Organic Chemistry<br />

1. An organic compound (A), C 10 H 15 N, undergoes<br />

carbylamine reaction but no diazotization. It reacts<br />

with HNO 2 giving off N 2 and a compound (B),<br />

C 10 H 14 O. (B) reacts with Lucas reagent immediately,<br />

but no colour in Victor meyer's test. (B) on heating<br />

with conc. H 2 SO 4 eliminates water to give (C),<br />

C 10 H 12 , which decolourises Br 2 /CCl 4 and cold dilute<br />

neutral KMnO 4 solution. (C) on ozonolysis gives (D),<br />

C 7 H 6 O and (E), C 3 H 6 O. Compound (E) on heating<br />

with I 2 and NaOH produced yellow precipitate and<br />

sodium acetate. Compound (D) reacts with conc.<br />

NaOH to give (F) and (G). Compound (G) on heating<br />

with sodalime gives benzene. Compound (F) gives a<br />

red colour with ceric ammonium nitrate, and on<br />

oxidation and heating the product with sodalime<br />

produced benzene. What are (A) to (G) <br />

Sol. The given data are :<br />

HNO 2<br />

C 10 H 15 N<br />

–N<br />

(A)<br />

2;–H 2O<br />

C 7 H 6 O<br />

(D)<br />

3H6O<br />

(E)<br />

Conc. NaOH<br />

Conc. H2SO4<br />

C 10 H 14 O<br />

∆;–H<br />

(B)<br />

2O<br />

(I) O 3<br />

(II) H 2/Pd<br />

C 10 H 12<br />

(C)<br />

C 7 H 6 O + C 3 H 6 O<br />

(D) (E)<br />

(F) + (G) Sodalime C 6 H 6<br />

[O]<br />

Sodalime<br />

Product C<br />

∆ 6 H 6<br />

C ⎯<br />

2 ⎯<br />

I 2 +NaOH ⎯⎯<br />

→ CHI 3 ↓ + CH 3 COONa<br />

+ 3NaI + 3H 2 O<br />

Since (C) decolourise Br 2 /CCl 4 and KMnO 4 colour,<br />

hence it has C=C bond. Its ozonolysis gives (D)<br />

and (E). Among these (D) undergoes Cannizaro's<br />

reaction, while (E) gives iodo<strong>for</strong>m test, hence (D) is<br />

benzaldehyde and (E) acetone. Now joining (D) and<br />

(E), the structure of (C) can be determined.<br />

H<br />

C=O + O =C<br />

CH 3<br />

–2[O]<br />

(D) (E) CH 3<br />

H<br />

C=C<br />

CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

CH 3<br />

Since (C) is produced from (B), which is a t-alcohol,<br />

as it gives Lucas test immediately, hence (B) is.<br />

H<br />

CH 3<br />

C–CH<br />

CH 3<br />

OH<br />

(B)<br />

As (B) is obtained by the action of HNO 2 on (A),<br />

hence (A) would be<br />

H<br />

CH 3<br />

C–CH<br />

CH 3<br />

NH 2<br />

(A)<br />

2. Two isomeric compounds (A) and (B) have the<br />

molecular <strong>for</strong>mula C 7 H 9 N. (A) being soluble in<br />

water, the solution being alkaline to litmus It does not<br />

undergoes diazotization, but show carbylamine<br />

reaction and mustard oil reaction, it reacts with acetyl<br />

chloride and acetic anhydride. Its product with<br />

benzene sulphonyl chloride dissolves in KOH. (B) on<br />

the other hand, does not dissolve in water, but<br />

undergoes diazotization. Its product with C 6 H 5 SO 2 Cl<br />

dissolves in KOH. Its salt undergo hydrolysis in<br />

aqueous solution showing an acidic test. What are<br />

(A) and (B) <br />

Sol. As both (A) and (B) give products with C 6 H 5 SO 2 Cl,<br />

which are soluble in KOH, they contain –NH 2 group.<br />

(B) can be diazotized so contains – NH 2 in the<br />

nucleus. (A) cannot be diazotized, hence contains<br />

–NH 2 in the side chain. The number of carbon and<br />

hydrogen atoms also indicates aromatic character.<br />

On the basis of above considerations we may show<br />

that (A) is benzylamine and (B) o – , m – or p-toludine.<br />

CH 2 NH 2 NaNO 2 + HCl CH 2 OH<br />

Benzylamine<br />

(A)<br />

CHCl 3 + 3KOH<br />

CS 2 + HgCl 2<br />

C 6H 5SO 2Cl<br />

– HCl<br />

CH 2 NC<br />

CH 2 NCS<br />

CH 2 NHSO 2 C 6 H 5<br />

KOH CH 2 N–SO 2 C 6 H 5<br />

–H 2O<br />

K<br />

Soluble<br />

C 6 H 5 CH 2 NH 2 + HOH ⎯→ C 6 H 5 CH 2 N + H 3 OH –<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 39 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


C 6 H 4<br />

(B)<br />

CH 3<br />

NH 2<br />

NaNO 2 + HCl<br />

C 6 H 4<br />

CH 3<br />

N 2 Cl<br />

(A)<br />

– CH.CH 3<br />

HOH/H +<br />

Cl –HCl<br />

(B)<br />

– CH–CH 3<br />

OH<br />

C 6H 5SO 2Cl<br />

–HCl<br />

C 6 H 4<br />

CH 3 KOH<br />

NHSO 2 C 6 H 5<br />

C 6 H 4<br />

CH 3<br />

NKSO 2 C 6 H 5<br />

Soluble<br />

[O]<br />

–H 2O<br />

(C)<br />

– COCH 3<br />

3. An organic compound (A) of molecular weight<br />

140.5, has 68.32% C, 6.4% H and 25.26% Cl.<br />

Hydrolysis of (A) with dilute acid gives compound<br />

(B), C 8 H 10 O. (B) can be oxidised under milder<br />

conditions to (C), C 8 H 8 O. (C) <strong>for</strong>ms a phenyl<br />

hydrazone (D) with C 6 H 5 NHNH 2 and gives positive<br />

iodo<strong>for</strong>m test. What are (A) to (D) <br />

Sol. (i) Calculation of empirical <strong>for</strong>mula of (A)<br />

Element %<br />

C 68.32<br />

H 6.4<br />

Cl 25.26<br />

Relative no.<br />

of atoms<br />

68.32<br />

= 5.59<br />

12<br />

6.4<br />

= 6.40<br />

1<br />

25.26<br />

= 0.71<br />

35.5<br />

Simplest<br />

ratio<br />

5.59<br />

= 8<br />

0.71<br />

6.40<br />

= 9<br />

0.71<br />

0.71<br />

= 1<br />

0.71<br />

Empirical <strong>for</strong>mula = C 8 H 9 Cl<br />

Empirical <strong>for</strong>mula wt. = 140.5<br />

Molecular weight = Emp. <strong>for</strong>mula weight<br />

Hence, Molecular <strong>for</strong>mula = Empirical <strong>for</strong>mula<br />

= C 8 H 9 Cl<br />

(ii) Given that<br />

C8H<br />

Cl<br />

9<br />

(A)<br />

⎯ HOH ⎯ → C8H9OH<br />

(B)<br />

[O]<br />

⎯⎯→ C H<br />

−H2O<br />

8 8O<br />

(C)<br />

(iii) (C) reacts with C 6 H 5 NHNH 2 to give<br />

C 8 H 8 =N.NHC 6 H 5 , hence (C) contains a C = O<br />

group.<br />

(iv) (C) on heating with I 2 + NaOH gives CHI 3 , hence<br />

(C) contains –COCH 3 group. Thus (C) is<br />

O<br />

– C – CH 3<br />

(v) Oxidation of (B) gives (C), hence (B) is a<br />

secondary alcohol, i.e.,<br />

– CH – CH 3<br />

OH<br />

(vi) (B) is obtained by the hydrolysis of (A), hence it<br />

is :<br />

– CH.CH 3<br />

Cl<br />

1-Chloro-1-phenyl ethane<br />

Now, different reactions are as follows :<br />

– C = O + H 2 N . NH . C 6 H 5<br />

CH 3<br />

(C) – C=N.NH.C 6 H 5<br />

(C)<br />

–H 2O CH 3<br />

∆<br />

– C – CH 3 + 3I 2 + 4NaOH ⎯→ CHI 3 + 3NaI<br />

Yellow ppt<br />

O<br />

– COONa<br />

+ 3H 2 O +<br />

4. An organic compound (A), C 4 H 9 Cl, on reacting with<br />

aqueous KOH gives (B) and on reaction with<br />

alcoholic KOH gives (C) which is also <strong>for</strong>med on<br />

passing vapours of (B) over heated copper. The<br />

compound (C) readily decolourises bromine water.<br />

Ozonolysis of (C) gives two compounds (D) and (E).<br />

Compound (D) reacts with NH 2 OH to gives (F) and<br />

the compound (E) reacts with NaOH to give an<br />

alcohol (G) and sodium salt (H) of an acid. (D) can<br />

also be prepared from propyne on treatment with<br />

water in presence of Hg ++ and H 2 SO 4 . Identify (A) to<br />

(H) with proper reasoning.<br />

Sol.<br />

Alc. KOH<br />

C 4 H 9 Cl<br />

(A)<br />

∆; –KCl<br />

(Alkyl halide)<br />

Aq.KOH<br />

C 4 H 8<br />

(C)<br />

(Alkene)<br />

Cu<br />

C<br />

∆; –KCl 4 H 9 OH<br />

∆; –H<br />

(B)<br />

2O<br />

(Alcohol)<br />

We know that p-alcohol on heating with Cu gives<br />

aldehyde while s-alcohol under similar conditions<br />

gives ketone. Thus, (B) is a t-alcohol because it, on<br />

heating with Cu gives an alkene (C). Since a t-<br />

alcohol is obtained by the hydrolysis of a t-alkyl<br />

halide, hence (A) is t-butyl chloride.<br />

(A) = CH<br />

3<br />

Cl<br />

|<br />

− C − CH3<br />

and (B) = CH<br />

|<br />

CH<br />

3<br />

3<br />

OH<br />

|<br />

− C − CH<br />

|<br />

CH<br />

The alkene (C) on ozonolysis gives (D) and (E),<br />

hence (C) is not symmetrical alkene. In these<br />

compound (E) gives Cannizaro's reaction with<br />

NaOH. So, (E) is an aldehyde which does not contain<br />

α–H atom. Hence it is HCHO. Compound (D) can<br />

also be prepared by the hydration of propyne in the<br />

presence of acidic solution and Hg ++ .<br />

3<br />

3<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 40 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


CH 3 – C ≡ CH + H 2 O<br />

Hg<br />

++<br />

⎯⎯⎯<br />

→<br />

H<br />

+<br />

CH3 − C = CH<br />

OH<br />

| 2<br />

⎯→ CH3 − C − CH3<br />

||<br />

O<br />

(D)<br />

Hence (D) is acetone and (E) is <strong>for</strong>maldehyde.<br />

There<strong>for</strong>e, alkene (C) is 2-methyl propene.<br />

(CH 3 ) 2 –C=CH 2<br />

(D) reacts with hydroxyl amine (NH 2 OH) to <strong>for</strong>m<br />

oxime (F).<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(B) = CH<br />

C = O + H 2 NOH –H 2O CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

C = NOH<br />

(D) (F)<br />

3<br />

Reactions :<br />

Cl<br />

|<br />

CH 3 − C − CH 3<br />

|<br />

CH 3<br />

(A)<br />

Cu /300ºC<br />

⎯ ⎯⎯⎯→<br />

−H2O<br />

Alc.KOH / ∆<br />

⎯ ⎯⎯⎯⎯<br />

→<br />

−KCl;<br />

−H2O<br />

(I) O<br />

CH 3 – C = CH 3<br />

2<br />

(II) H 2 O/Zn<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

C = O + H 2 NOH<br />

(D)<br />

2 HCHO + NaOH →<br />

(E)<br />

CH 3 – C ≡ CH + H 2 O<br />

OH<br />

|<br />

− C − CH3<br />

and (A) = CH<br />

|<br />

CH<br />

3<br />

3<br />

Cl<br />

|<br />

− C − CH<br />

|<br />

CH<br />

OH<br />

|<br />

Aq.KOH CH<br />

⎯⎯ ⎯⎯ →<br />

3 − C − CH 3<br />

∆;–KCl<br />

|<br />

CH 3<br />

(B)<br />

CH 3 − C = CH 2 + H 2O<br />

|<br />

CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

CH 3 − C = CH 2<br />

|<br />

CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

∆<br />

–H 2 O<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(D)<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3OH +<br />

(G)<br />

++<br />

Hg<br />

C = O + H – C – H<br />

3<br />

C = NOH<br />

(F)<br />

HCOONa<br />

(H)<br />

O<br />

O<br />

(E)<br />

⎯⎯⎯<br />

→CH + 3 – C – CH 3<br />

H<br />

(D)<br />

3<br />

5. A hydrocarbon (A) of the <strong>for</strong>mula C 8 H 10 , on<br />

ozonolysis gives compound (B), C 4 H 6 O 2 , only. The<br />

compound (B) can also be obtained from the alkyl<br />

bromide, (C) (C 3 H 4 Br) upon treatment with Mg in<br />

dry ether, followed by treatment with CO 2 and<br />

acidification. Identify (A), (B) and (C) and also<br />

equations <strong>for</strong> the reactions.<br />

(i) O<br />

Sol. A(C 8 H 10 ) ⎯⎯⎯ 3 → C H<br />

(ii) H2O<br />

4 6O2<br />

(B)<br />

Since compound (A) adds one mol of O 3 , hence it<br />

should have either C = C or a – C ≡ C – bond.<br />

If it was alkene its <strong>for</strong>mula should be C 8 H 16 (C n H 2n ),<br />

and if it was alkyne it should have the <strong>for</strong>mula C 8 H 14 ;<br />

it means it is neither a simple alkenen or simple<br />

alkyne. However it is definite that the compound has<br />

an unsaturated group, it appears that it is a<br />

cyclosubstituted ethyne.<br />

2H<br />

H – C ≡ C – H ⎯ − ⎯⎯→C 3 H 5 – C ≡ C – C 3 H 5<br />

+ C 6 H 10<br />

the C 3 H 5 – corresponds to cyclopropyl (∆) radical,<br />

hence compund (A) is<br />

CH 2<br />

CH 2<br />

CH – C≡C – CH<br />

CH 2 CH 2<br />

1,2-dicyclopropyl ethyne<br />

The ozonolysis of above compound would give two<br />

moles of cyclopropane carboxylic acid (C 4 H 6 O 2 ).<br />

CH 2<br />

CH 2<br />

(i) O<br />

CH – C≡C – CH<br />

3<br />

CH 2 CH 2<br />

(A)<br />

O<br />

CH 2<br />

CH 2<br />

CH – C — C – CH H 2O<br />

CH 2 CH Warm 2<br />

(A) O O<br />

CH 2<br />

CH 2<br />

CH – C – C – CH + H 2 O 2<br />

CH 2 CH 2<br />

O O<br />

CH 2<br />

2 CH – COOH<br />

CH 2<br />

(B)<br />

Compound (B) is prepared from cyclopropyl bromide<br />

as follows :<br />

O<br />

CH 2<br />

CH<br />

Mg 2<br />

C=O<br />

CH – Br<br />

CH . MgBr<br />

CH ether<br />

2 CH ∆<br />

2<br />

Cyclopropyl<br />

magnesium bromide<br />

CH 2<br />

CH<br />

HOH 2<br />

CH .COOMgBr<br />

CH–COOH<br />

CH dil. HCl;<br />

2 CH 2<br />

–MgBrOH<br />

Addition compound<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 41 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


`tà{xÅtà|vtÄ V{tÄÄxÇzxá<br />

3 Set<br />

This section is designed to give <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety<br />

of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing<br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and<br />

we hope that this section would prove a rich resource <strong>for</strong> practicing challenging problems and<br />

enhancing the preparation level of <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> aspirants.<br />

By : Shailendra Maheshwari<br />

Solutions will be published in next issue<br />

Joint Director Academics, <strong>Career</strong> <strong>Point</strong>, Kota<br />

1. Let y = f(x) be a curve satisfying<br />

dy – y ln 2 = 2<br />

sin x (cos x – 1). ln2, then<br />

dx<br />

(A) y is bounded when x → ∞<br />

(B) f(x) = 2 sin x + c . 2 x , where c is an arbitrary<br />

constant<br />

(C) y = 2 sinx , y is bounded when x → ∞<br />

(D) f(x) = 2 sinx does not have any solution if y is not<br />

bounded.<br />

2. In a right angled triangle the length of its hypotenuse<br />

is four times the length of the perpendicular drawn<br />

from its orthocentre on the hypotenuse. The acute<br />

angles of the triangle can be<br />

π π<br />

π 3π<br />

(A) , (B) , 6 3 8 8<br />

(C) 6<br />

π , 4<br />

π<br />

π 5π<br />

(D) , 12 12<br />

7. Find all the real values of a, <strong>for</strong> which the roots of the<br />

equation x 2 – 2x – a 2 + 1 = 0 lie between the roots of<br />

equation<br />

x 2 – 2(a + 1) x + a(a – 1) = 0<br />

8. Given the base of a triangle and the sum of its sides<br />

prove that the locus of the centre of its incircle is an<br />

ellipse.<br />

9. A bag contains 7 tickets marked with the number 0,<br />

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 respectively. A ticket is drawn and<br />

replaced. Then the chance that after 4 drawings the<br />

sum of the numbers drawn is 8, is –<br />

10. A polynomial in x of degree greater than 3 leaves<br />

remainders 2, 1 and – 1 when divided by (x – 1), (x + 2)<br />

and (x + 1) respectively. What would be the remainder<br />

if the polynomial is divided by (x 2 – 1) (x + 2) <br />

3. Let a, b ∈ R such that 0 < a < 1 and 0 < b < 1. The<br />

values of a and b such that the complex number<br />

z 1 = –a + i, z 2 = –1 + bi and z 3 = 0 <strong>for</strong>m an equilateral<br />

triangle are<br />

(A) 2 − 3, 3 (B) 2 − 3, 2 − 3<br />

(C) 3,<br />

2 − 3 (D) None of these<br />

4. If c 1 is a fixed circle and c 2 is a variable circle with<br />

fixed radius. The common transverse tangents to c 1<br />

and c 2 are perpendicular to each other. The locus of<br />

the centre of variable circle is :<br />

(A) circle<br />

(B) ellipse<br />

(C) hyperbola (D) parabola<br />

5. The length of the latus rectum of the parabola<br />

169 {(x – 1) 2 + (y – 3) 2 } = (5x – 12y + 17) 2 is –<br />

14 56 28<br />

(A) (B) (C) (D) None<br />

13 13 13<br />

cos5x + cos 4x<br />

6. Evaluate :<br />

∫<br />

dx<br />

1−<br />

2cos3x<br />

• William Bottke at Cornell University in the US<br />

has calculated that at least 900 asteroids of a<br />

kilometre or more across regularly sweep<br />

across Earth's path.<br />

• The Dutch astronomer Christiaan Huygens<br />

(1629 - 1695) drew Mars using an advanced<br />

telescope of his own design. He recorded a<br />

large, dark spot on Mars, probably Syrtis Major.<br />

He noticed that the spot returned to the same<br />

position at the same time the next day, and<br />

calculated that Mars has a 24 hour period. (It is<br />

actually 24 hours and 37 minutes)<br />

• Space debris travels through space at over<br />

18,000 mph.<br />

• The nucleus of Comet Halley is approximately<br />

16x8x8 kilometers. Contrary to prior<br />

expectations, Halley's nucleus is very dark: its<br />

albedo is only about 0.03 making it darker than<br />

coal and one of the darkest objects in the solar<br />

system.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 42 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES<br />

SOLUTION FOR JUNE ISSUE (SET # 2)<br />

Hence plane given by (3) is bisecting the acute angle<br />

1. 1 st box can be filled in 4 ways.<br />

⇒ tan θ =<br />

1037 < 1 ⇒ 47 + 1 + 1 = 49<br />

61<br />

Next each box can be filled in 3 ways (except the ball<br />

of colour in previous box).<br />

between given two planes also. Hence the conclusion<br />

holds true.<br />

Hence the required no. of ways = 4 × 3 5 = 972<br />

f (b)<br />

−1<br />

2 2<br />

5. Let I<br />

2. Given |A| ≠ 0; AA –1 = I ⇒ (AA –1 ) T = I T<br />

2 =<br />

∫<br />

(( f (y)) − a ) dy<br />

f (a)<br />

(A –1 ) T A T = I (as A is symmetric)<br />

Let f –1 (y) = x<br />

(A –1 ) T A = I<br />

⇒ f(x) = y<br />

so by the definition of inverse A –1 = (A –1 ) T<br />

b<br />

Hence A –1 2 2<br />

is also symmetric.<br />

I 2 =<br />

∫<br />

( x − a ) f´(x) dx<br />

a<br />

Using by parts<br />

3. The normal to hyperbola at the point<br />

2 2<br />

P(a sec θ, b tan θ) is<br />

I 2 = ( x − a )f (x)) b a<br />

–<br />

∫ b<br />

2x<br />

f(x) dx<br />

a<br />

ax cos θ + by cot θ = a 2 + b 2<br />

If it passes through (h, k) then<br />

= (b 2 – a 2 ) f(b) –<br />

∫ b<br />

2x<br />

f(x) dx<br />

a h cos θ + b k cot θ = a 2 + b 2 a<br />

...(1)<br />

Let z = e iθ z 2 +1<br />

=<br />

= cos θ + i sin θ then put cos θ =<br />

∫ b<br />

2x<br />

f(b) dx –<br />

a ∫ b<br />

2x<br />

f(x) dx<br />

a<br />

2z<br />

⎛<br />

2<br />

⎞<br />

and cot θ = i ⎜<br />

z + 1<br />

=<br />

⎟ in the equation (1).<br />

∫ b<br />

2 x (f(b) – f(x)) dx<br />

a<br />

2<br />

⎝ z −1⎠<br />

I<br />

ahz 4 + 2(i bk – (a 2 + b 2 )) z 3<br />

1 1<br />

Hence =<br />

I<br />

+ 2(i bk + (a 2 + b 2 2 2<br />

))z – ah = 0<br />

z 1 , z 2 , z 3 , z 4 are its four solutions so<br />

i(<br />

θ1<br />

+θ2<br />

)<br />

Σ z 1 z 2 = 0 = Σ e = 0<br />

6.<br />

1<br />

y + = 2 y<br />

Σ (cos (θ 1 + θ 2 ) + i sin (θ 1 + θ 2 )) = 0<br />

⇒ y = 1<br />

Hence Σ cos(θ 1 + θ 2 ) = Σ sin(θ 1 + θ 2 ) = 0<br />

1<br />

x + = 5 + 2<br />

4. Planes are – x – 2y – 2z + 9 = 0 ....(1)<br />

x<br />

and 4x – 3y + 12z + 13 = 0 ...(2)<br />

⇒ x 2 1<br />

+<br />

2<br />

The plane bisecting the angle b/w these planes<br />

x<br />

containing origin is<br />

= ( 5 + 2) – 2 = 5<br />

−x − 2y − 2z + 9 4 x − 3y + 12z + 13<br />

= +<br />

3<br />

13<br />

x 4 1<br />

+<br />

4 = 5 – 2<br />

x<br />

i.e. 25x + 17y + 62z – 78 = 0 ...(3)<br />

If θ be the angle between (1) & (3) then<br />

⇒ x 8 1<br />

+<br />

8 = 9 – 2<br />

x<br />

61<br />

cos θ =<br />

4758<br />

⇒ x 16 1<br />

+ = 49 – 2<br />

16<br />

x<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 43 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


7. Let the radius of S 2 is r<br />

6<br />

r<br />

r<br />

6<br />

6<br />

2 r + r + 6 = 2 6<br />

⎛ ⎞<br />

r = 6 ⎜<br />

2 −1<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ 2 + 1⎠<br />

= 6(3 – 2 2 )<br />

= 18 – 12 2<br />

8. S 1 = 2 + 4 + 6 + .... + 120<br />

60<br />

= (2 + 120)<br />

2<br />

= 30 × 122 = 3660<br />

S 2 = 7 + 14 + 21 + ..... + 119<br />

17<br />

= (7 + 119) 2<br />

= 17 × 63 = 1071<br />

S 3 = 14 + 28 + ..... + 102<br />

= 2<br />

8 (14 + 112)<br />

= 4 × 126 = 504<br />

120×121<br />

Ans. = – 3660 – 1071 + 504<br />

2<br />

= 7260 – 4731 + 504<br />

= 2529 + 504<br />

= 3033<br />

9. Here F(x) is even function<br />

so f(x) = F(–x) = F(x)<br />

⇒ f(–x) = f(x)<br />

g(x) = –F(x) = – f(x) = –f(–x)<br />

h(x) = –F(–x) = – F(x) = –f(x)<br />

Ans. (C)<br />

10. f(x) + h(x) = f(x) – f(x) = 0<br />

g(x) – h(x) = – f(x) + f(x) = 0<br />

F(x) + f(x) ≠ 0<br />

f(x) – g(x) = f(x) + f(x) ≠ 0<br />

Ans. (B)<br />

6<br />

Brief Description : zirconium is a grayish-white lustrous<br />

metal. The finely divided metal can ignite spontaneously<br />

in air, especially at elevated temperatures. The solid<br />

metal is much more difficult to ignite. The inherent<br />

toxicity of zirconium compounds is low. Hafnium is<br />

invariably found in zirconium ores, and the separation is<br />

difficult. Commercial grade zirconium contains from 1 to<br />

3% hafnium. The hafnium is removed from the zirconium<br />

used in the nuclear power industry.<br />

Zirconium is found in S-type stars, and has been<br />

identified in the sun and meteorites. Analyses of lunar<br />

rock samples show a surprisingly high zirconium oxide<br />

content as compared with terrestrial rocks. Some <strong>for</strong>ms<br />

of zircon (ZrSiO4) have excellent gemstone qualities.<br />

Table: basic in<strong>for</strong>mation about and classifications of<br />

zirconium.<br />

• Name : Zirconium<br />

• Symbol : Zr<br />

• Atomic number : 40<br />

• Atomic weight : 91.224 (2)<br />

• Standard state : solid at 298 K<br />

• CAS Registry ID : 7440-67-7<br />

• Group in periodic table : 4<br />

• Group name : (none)<br />

• Period in periodic table : 5<br />

• Block in periodic table : d-block<br />

• Colour : silvery white<br />

• Classification : Metallic<br />

ISOLATION<br />

Isolation : zirconium is available from commercial<br />

sources so preparation in the laboratory is not normally<br />

required. In industry, reduction of ores with carbon is<br />

not a useful option as intractable carbides are produced.<br />

As <strong>for</strong> titanium, the Kroll method is used <strong>for</strong> zirconium<br />

and involves the action of chlorine and carbon upon<br />

baddeleyite (ZrO2). The resultant zirconium<br />

tetrachloride, ZrCl4, is separated from the iron<br />

trichloride, FeCl3, by fractional distillation. Finally ZrCl4<br />

is reduced to metallic zirconium by reduction with<br />

magnesium, Mg. Air is excluded so as to prevent<br />

contamination of the product with oxygen or nitrogen.<br />

ZrO2 + 2Cl2 + 2C (900°C) → ZrCl4 + 2CO<br />

ZrCl4 + 2Mg (1100°C) → 2MgCl2 + Zr<br />

Excess magnesium and magnesium dichloride is removed<br />

from the product by treatment with water and<br />

hydrochloric acid to leave a zirconium "sponge". This<br />

can be melted under helium by electrical heating.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 44 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Students' Forum<br />

Expert’s Solution <strong>for</strong> Question asked by <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> Aspirants<br />

MATHS<br />

1. Let f(x) be a function which satisfy the equation<br />

f(xy) = f(x) + f(y) <strong>for</strong> all x > 0, y > 0 such that<br />

f ´(1) = 2. Find the area of region bounded by the<br />

curves y = f(x), y = |x 3 – 6x 2 + 11x – 6| and x = 0<br />

Sol. Take x = y = 1 ⇒ f(1) = 0<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

Now f ⎜ x . ⎟ = f(x) + f ⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ x ⎠ ⎝ x ⎠<br />

⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

⇒ f ⎜ ⎟ = – f(x)<br />

⎝ x ⎠<br />

⎛ x<br />

f ⎟ ⎞ ⎛ 1<br />

⎜ = f(x) + f<br />

⎝ y<br />

⎟ ⎞<br />

⎜ = f(x) – f(y)<br />

⎠ ⎝ y ⎠<br />

f (x + h) − f (x)<br />

f ´(x) = lim<br />

h→0<br />

h<br />

⎛ h ⎞<br />

f ⎜1<br />

+ ⎟ − f (1)<br />

1 ⎛ x + h ⎞ ⎝ x ⎠<br />

= lim f ⎜ ⎟ = lim<br />

h→0<br />

h ⎝ h ⎠ h→0<br />

h<br />

. x<br />

x<br />

f´(1) 2<br />

= =<br />

x x<br />

⇒ f(x) = 2 log |x| + c ⇒ c = 0<br />

{when x = 1; as f(1) = 0}<br />

⇒ f(x) = 2logx<br />

∴ Required area<br />

1<br />

=<br />

∫<br />

( x − 6x + 11x − 6)dx + e dy<br />

0<br />

3<br />

= 4<br />

7 sq units<br />

2<br />

0<br />

y / 2<br />

∫–<br />

∞<br />

⎛<br />

= cos x . ⎜<br />

⎜<br />

⎝<br />

n<br />

∑<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

cosa<br />

2<br />

k<br />

k−1<br />

⎞ ⎛<br />

⎟ – sin x ⎜<br />

⎟ ⎜<br />

⎠ ⎝<br />

n<br />

∑<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

= A cos x – B sin x, where A = ∑<br />

k=<br />

n<br />

sin a<br />

B = ∑<br />

k<br />

k−1<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

2<br />

since f(x 1 ) = f(x 2 ) = 0<br />

⇒ A cos x 1 – B sin x 1 = 0<br />

and A cos x 2 – B sin x 2 = 0<br />

A<br />

⇒ tan x 1 = B<br />

⇒ tan x 2 = B<br />

A<br />

⇒ tan x 1 = tan x 2<br />

⇒ (x 2 – x 1 ) = mπ<br />

n<br />

1<br />

sin a<br />

2<br />

k<br />

k−1<br />

cosa<br />

2<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

k<br />

k−1<br />

and<br />

3. Let a variable chord from (–1, 0) point to the circle<br />

(x – 2) 2 + y 2 = 1, makes a intercept of length 'l' on the<br />

circle and length of perpendicular from centre of the<br />

circle to chord is 'p'. find the range of 'λ' such that<br />

l 2 + 3λ p 2 + 5 = 0.<br />

Sol. We have OB 2 = OD 2 + BD 2<br />

A<br />

(–1, 0) 0<br />

D<br />

p<br />

B<br />

2. Let a 1 , a 2 , ......, a n be real constant, x be a real variable<br />

and f(x) = cos(a 1 + x) + 2<br />

1 cos(a2 + x) + 4<br />

1 cos(a3 + x)<br />

1<br />

+...... + cos(a<br />

n−1<br />

n + x). Given that f(x 1 ) = f(x 2 ) = 0,<br />

2<br />

prove that (x 2 – x 1 ) = mπ <strong>for</strong> integer m.<br />

Sol. f(x) may be written as,<br />

n<br />

f(x) = ∑<br />

k=<br />

n<br />

= ∑<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

1<br />

k<br />

2<br />

1<br />

k<br />

2<br />

1 cos(ak + x)<br />

−1<br />

−1<br />

{cosa k . cos x – sin a k . sin x}<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 = p 2 l<br />

+ ⇒ p 2 4 − l<br />

= 4 4<br />

we have been given, l 2 + 3λp 2 + 5 = 0<br />

l 2 3λ ⎛<br />

2<br />

⎞<br />

+ ⎜<br />

4 − l<br />

⎟ + 5 = 0<br />

4<br />

⎝ 4 ⎠<br />

l 2 12λ + 20<br />

=<br />

3λ − 4<br />

clearly 0 ≤ l 2 < 4<br />

4( λ + 5/ 3)<br />

⇒ 0 ≤<br />

< 4<br />

( λ − 4 / 3)<br />

⇒ λ ∈ (– ∞, –5/3)<br />

[as λ can not be + ve]<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 45 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


4. Find all possible negative real values of 'a' such that<br />

∫<br />

a<br />

0<br />

−2t<br />

Sol. Here,<br />

∫<br />

−t<br />

( 9 − 2.9 ) dt ≥ 0<br />

a<br />

0<br />

−2t<br />

( 9 − 2.9 ) dt ≥ 0<br />

⎛<br />

−2t<br />

−t<br />

9 2.9 ⎞<br />

⇒ ⎜<br />

⎟<br />

− ≥ 0<br />

2log9 log9<br />

⎝ − − ⎠a<br />

−2t<br />

−t<br />

⇒ ( − 9 + (49) ) 0 a<br />

≥ 0<br />

⇒ 9 –2a – 4.9 –a + 3 ≥ 0<br />

t 2 – 4t + 3 ≥ 0<br />

where t = 9 –a and t ∈(1, ∞)<br />

(t – 1) (t – 3) ≥ 0<br />

⇒ t ≤ 1 or t ≥ 3<br />

⇒ t ≥ 3 is possible as t > 1<br />

9 –a 1<br />

≥ 3 ⇒ a ≤ – 2<br />

t<br />

0<br />

⇒<br />

2<br />

⎛ a − a ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟<br />

⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

2<br />

⎛ a + a ⎞<br />

+ ⎜ ⎟ = 0<br />

⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

2<br />

⎛ a − a ⎞ ⎛ a + a ⎞<br />

⇒ – ⎜ ⎟ + ⎜ ⎟ = 0<br />

⎝ 2i ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠<br />

⇒ – sin 2 θ + cos θ = 0<br />

⇒ cos θ = sin 2 θ<br />

...(iii)<br />

Now, f(x) = x 3 – 3x 2 + 3(1 + cos θ)x + 5<br />

f ´(x) = 3x 2 – 6x + 3 (1 + cos θ)<br />

∴ Discriminate (D)<br />

= 36 – 36(1 + cos θ) = – 36 cos θ<br />

= – 36 sin 2 θ < 0<br />

⇒ f(x) is increasing ∀ x ∈ R<br />

2<br />

5. Let a 0 , a 1 , .... a n – 1 be real numbers where n ≥ 1 and<br />

het f(x) = x n + a n – 1 x n –1 + ..... + a 0 be such that :<br />

|f(0)| = f(1) and each root of f(x) = 0 is real and lies<br />

between 0 and 1. Prove that the product of the roots<br />

1<br />

does not exceed<br />

n .<br />

2<br />

Sol. Let, f(x) = (x – α 1 ) (x – α 2 ) ..... (x – α n )<br />

where α 1 , α 2 ........, α n are the roots of f(x) = 0<br />

since |f(0)| = f(1)<br />

∴ α 1 . α 2 ...... α n = (1 – α 1 ) (1 – α 2 ) ...... (1 – α n )<br />

⇒ (α 1 . α 2 ....... α n ) 2<br />

⇒ α 1 (1 – α 1 ) α 2 (1 – α 2 ) ...... α n (1 – α n )<br />

⇒ (Π α i ) 2 = II α i (1 – α i ) . {i = 1, 2, ..... n}<br />

Now, ( Π α i ) 2 = Π α i (1 – α i ) ≤ Π<br />

1<br />

=<br />

2n<br />

2<br />

Since GM ≤ AM<br />

1<br />

⇒ ( Π α i ) ≤<br />

n<br />

2<br />

⎧α + (1 − αi<br />

) ⎫<br />

⎨ ⎬<br />

⎩ 2 ⎭<br />

6. If the equation az 2 + z + 1 = 0 has a purely imaginary<br />

root where a = cos θ + i sin θ, i = − 1 . Then find<br />

the interval in which the function, f(x) = x 3 – 3x 2 +<br />

3(1 + cos θ)x + 5 is increasing.<br />

Sol. We have, az 2 + z + 1 = 0<br />

...(i)<br />

⇒ az 2 + z + 1 = 0 {Taking conjugate on both sides}<br />

⇒ a z 2 + z + 1 = 0<br />

...(ii)<br />

Eliminating z from eq. (i) and (ii) by cross<br />

multiplication rule,<br />

(a – a) 2 + 2(a + a ) = 0<br />

2<br />

Regents Physics<br />

You Should Know Electricity<br />

1. A coulomb is charge, an amp is current<br />

[coulomb/sec] and a volt is potential difference<br />

[joule/coulomb].<br />

2. Short fat cold wires make the best conductors.<br />

3. Electrons and protons have equal amounts of<br />

charge (1.6 x 10 -19 coulombs each).<br />

4. Adding a resistor in parallel decreases the total<br />

resistance of a circuit.<br />

5. Adding a resistor in series increases the total<br />

resistance of a circuit.<br />

6. All resistors in series have equal current (I).<br />

7. All resistors in parallel have equal voltage (V).<br />

8. If two charged spheres touch each other add<br />

the charges and divide by two to find the final<br />

charge on each sphere.<br />

9. Insulators contain no free electrons.<br />

10. Ionized gases conduct electric current using<br />

positive ions, negative ions and electrons.<br />

11. Electric fields all point in the direction of the<br />

<strong>for</strong>ce on a positive test charge.<br />

12. Electric fields between two parallel plates are<br />

uni<strong>for</strong>m in strength except at the edges.<br />

13. Millikan determined the charge on a single<br />

electron using his famous oil-drop experiment.<br />

14. All charge changes result from the movement<br />

of electrons not protons (an object becomes<br />

positive by losing electrons)<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 46 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


MATHS<br />

3-DIMENSIONAL<br />

GEOMETRY<br />

Mathematics Fundamentals<br />

Coordinates of a point :<br />

Z<br />

L<br />

O<br />

x<br />

y<br />

P (x,y,z)<br />

Y<br />

x-coordinate = perpendicular distance of P from<br />

yz-plane<br />

y-coordinate = perpendicular distance of P from<br />

zx-plane<br />

z-coordinate = perpendicular distance of P from<br />

xy-plane<br />

Coordinates of a point on the coordinate planes and axes:<br />

yz-plane : x = 0<br />

zx-plane : y = 0<br />

xy-plane : z = 0<br />

x-axis : y = 0, z = 0<br />

y-axis : y = 0, x = 0<br />

z-axis : x = 0, y = 0<br />

Distance between two points :<br />

If P(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and Q(x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) are two points, then<br />

distance between them<br />

z<br />

N<br />

M<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 − x2)<br />

+ (y1<br />

− y2)<br />

+ (z1<br />

z2)<br />

PQ = ( x<br />

−<br />

Coordinates of division point :<br />

Coordinates of the point dividing the line joining two<br />

points P(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and Q(x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) in the ratio<br />

m 1 : m 2 are<br />

(i) in case of internal division<br />

⎛ m ⎞<br />

⎜ 1x2<br />

+ m2x1<br />

m1y2<br />

+ m2y1<br />

m1z<br />

2 + m2z<br />

,<br />

,<br />

1<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ m1<br />

+ m2<br />

m1<br />

+ m2<br />

m1<br />

+ m2<br />

⎠<br />

(ii) in case of external division<br />

⎛ m1x<br />

2 − m 2x1<br />

m1y<br />

2 − m 2 y1<br />

m1z<br />

2 − m 2z1<br />

⎞<br />

⎜<br />

,<br />

,<br />

⎟<br />

⎝ m1<br />

− m 2 m1<br />

− m 2 m1<br />

− m 2 ⎠<br />

X<br />

Note: When m 1 , m 2 are in opposite sign, then<br />

division will be external.<br />

Coordinates of the midpoint:<br />

When division point is the mid-point of PQ, then<br />

ration will be 1 : 1; hence coordinates of the midpoint<br />

of PQ are<br />

⎛ 1 + x2<br />

y + y z + z<br />

⎜ ,<br />

1 2<br />

,<br />

1<br />

⎝ 2 2 2<br />

x 2<br />

Coordinates of the general point :<br />

The coordinates of any point lying on the line joining<br />

points P(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and Q(x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) may be taken as<br />

⎛<br />

⎜<br />

⎝<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

kx2<br />

+ x1<br />

ky + y kz + z<br />

,<br />

2 1<br />

,<br />

2 1<br />

k + 1 k + 1 k + 1<br />

which divides PQ in the ratio k : 1. This is called<br />

general point on the line PQ.<br />

Division by coordinate planes :<br />

The ratios in which the line segment PQ joining<br />

P(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and Q(x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) is divided by coordinate<br />

planes are as follows :<br />

(i) by yz-plane : –x 1 /x 2 ratio<br />

(ii) by zx-plane : – y 1 /y 2 ratio<br />

(iii) by xy-plane : –z 1 /z 2 ratio<br />

Coordinates of the centroid :<br />

(i) If (x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ); (x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) and (x 3 , y 3 , z 3 ) are<br />

vertices of a triangle then coordinates of its centroid<br />

are<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

⎛ 1 + x 2 + x 3 y1<br />

+ y 2 + y3<br />

z1<br />

+ z 2 + z<br />

⎜<br />

,<br />

,<br />

⎝ 3<br />

3<br />

3<br />

x 3<br />

(ii) If (x r , y r , z r ); r = 1, 2, 3, 4 are vertices of a<br />

tetrahedron, then coordinates of its centroid are<br />

⎛ 1 + x 2 + x 3 + x 4 y1<br />

+ y 2 + y3<br />

+ y 4 z1<br />

+ z 2 + z 3 + z<br />

⎜<br />

,<br />

,<br />

⎝ 4<br />

4<br />

4<br />

x 4<br />

Direction cosines of a line [Dc's] :<br />

The cosines of the angles made by a line with<br />

positive direction of coordinate axes are called the<br />

direction cosines of that line.<br />

Let α, β, γ be the angles made by a line AB with<br />

positive direction of coordinate axes then cos α, cos<br />

β, cos γ are the direction cosines of AB which are<br />

generally denoted by l, m, n. Hence<br />

l = cos α, m = cos β, n = cos γ<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 47 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


x-axis makes 0º, 90º and 90º angles with three<br />

coordinate axes, so its direction cosines are cos 0º,<br />

cos 90º, cos 90º i.e. 1, 0, 0. Similarly direction<br />

cosines of y-axis and z-axis are 0, 1, 0 and 0, 0, 1<br />

respectively. Hence<br />

dc's of x-axis = 1, 0, 0<br />

dc's of y-axis = 0, 1, 0<br />

dc's of z-axis = 0, 0, 1<br />

Relation between dc's<br />

∴ l 2 + m 2 + n 2 = 1<br />

Direction ratios of a line [DR's] :<br />

Three numbers which are proportional to the<br />

direction cosines of a line are called the direction<br />

ratios of that line. If a, b, c are such numbers which<br />

are proportional to the direction cosines l, m, n of a<br />

line then a, b, c are direction ratios of the line. Hence<br />

a<br />

⇒ l = ±<br />

,<br />

2 2 2<br />

a + b + c<br />

b<br />

c<br />

m = ±<br />

, n = ±<br />

2 2 2<br />

2 2 2<br />

a + b + c a + b + c<br />

Direction cosines of a line joining two points :<br />

Let ≡ (x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and Q ≡ (x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ); then<br />

(i) dr's of PQ : (x 2 – x 1 ), (y 2 – y 1 ), (z 2 – z 1 )<br />

x z z<br />

(ii)dc's of PQ :<br />

2 − x1<br />

y y<br />

,<br />

2 − 1<br />

,<br />

2 − 1<br />

PQ PQ PQ<br />

i.e.,<br />

x<br />

2<br />

Σ(x<br />

− x<br />

−<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

x1)<br />

,<br />

y<br />

2<br />

Σ(x<br />

− y<br />

2<br />

−<br />

1<br />

2<br />

x1)<br />

,<br />

z<br />

2<br />

Σ(x<br />

− z<br />

−<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

x1)<br />

Angle between two lines :<br />

Case I. When dc's of the lines are given<br />

If l 1 , m 1 , and l 2 ,m 2 n 2 are dc's of given two lines, then<br />

the angle θ between them is given by<br />

cos θ = l 1 l 2 + m 1 m 2 + n 1 n 2<br />

sin θ = 2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

( l1 m2<br />

− l 2m1)<br />

+ (m1n<br />

2 − m2n1)<br />

+ (n1l<br />

2 − n2l1)<br />

The value of sin θ can easily be obtained by the<br />

following <strong>for</strong>m :<br />

sin θ =<br />

l1<br />

l 2<br />

m<br />

m<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

m<br />

+<br />

m<br />

1<br />

2<br />

n<br />

n<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

n<br />

+<br />

n<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

l1<br />

l 2<br />

Case II. When dr's of the lines are given<br />

If a 1 , b 1 , c 1 and a 2 , b 2 , c 2 are dr's of given two lines,<br />

then the angle θ between them is given by<br />

cos θ =<br />

sin θ =<br />

a<br />

a<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1<br />

a a<br />

+<br />

1 2<br />

2<br />

b1<br />

+ b<br />

2<br />

1<br />

+ b b<br />

+ c<br />

Σ(a<br />

b<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

+ c<br />

+ c c<br />

2<br />

2<br />

a2<br />

− a<br />

a<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1 2<br />

2<br />

b2<br />

+<br />

2<br />

2b1)<br />

+ b<br />

2<br />

2<br />

+ c<br />

+ c<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

Conditions of parallelism and perpendicularity of two<br />

lines :<br />

Case I. When dc's of two lines AB and CD, say l 1 ,<br />

m 1 ,n 1 and l 2, m 2 , n 2 are known<br />

AB || CD ⇔ l 1 = l 2, m 1 = m 2 , n 1 = n 2<br />

AB ⊥ CD ⇔ l 1 l 2 + m 1 m 2 + n 1 n 2 = 0.<br />

Case II. When dr's of two lines AB and CD, say : a 1 ,<br />

b 1 , c 1 and a 2 , b 2 , c 2 are known<br />

a<br />

AB || CD ⇔<br />

1 b1<br />

c<br />

= =<br />

1<br />

a2<br />

b2<br />

c2<br />

AB ⊥ CD ⇔ a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 + c 1 c 2 = 0.<br />

Area of a triangle :<br />

Let A(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ); B(x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ) and C(x 3 , y 3 , z 3 ) are<br />

vertices of a triangle. Then<br />

dr's of AB = x 2 – x 1 , y 2 – y 1 , z 2 – z 1<br />

= a 1 , b 1 , c 1 (say)<br />

2 2 2<br />

and AB = a 1 + b1<br />

+ c1<br />

dr's of BC = x 3 – x 2 , y 3 – y 2 , z 3 – z 2<br />

= a 2 , b 2 , c 2 (say)<br />

2 2 2<br />

and BC = a 2 + b2<br />

+ c2<br />

Now sin B =<br />

=<br />

2<br />

Σ(b1c<br />

2 − b2c1)<br />

2<br />

Σa1<br />

2<br />

Σa2<br />

2<br />

Σ(b1c<br />

2 − b2c1)<br />

AB.BC<br />

∴ Area of ∆ABC = 2<br />

1 AB. BC sin B<br />

=<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

Σ (b1 c2<br />

− b2c1)<br />

Projection of a line segment joining two points on a line :<br />

Let PQ be a line segment where P ≡ (x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) and<br />

Q ≡ (x 2 , y 2 , z 2 ); and AB be a given line with dc's as l,<br />

m, n. If P'Q' be the projection of PQ on AB, then<br />

P'Q' = PQ cos θ<br />

where θ is the angle between PQ and AB. On<br />

replacing the value of cos θ in this, we shall get the<br />

following value of P'Q'.<br />

P'Q' = l (x 2 – x 1 ) + m(y 2 – y 1 ) + n (z 2 – z 1 )<br />

Projection of PQ on x-axis : a = |x 2 – x 1 |<br />

Projection of PQ on y-axis : b = |y 2 – y 1 |<br />

Projection of PQ on z-axis : c = |z 2 – z 1 |<br />

Length of line segment PQ = a + b + c<br />

*<br />

x − α y − β z − γ<br />

If the given lines are = =<br />

l m n<br />

and<br />

x − α´<br />

y − β´ z − γ´<br />

= = ,<br />

l´<br />

m´ n´<br />

then condition <strong>for</strong><br />

intersection is<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 48 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


If the given lines are<br />

x − α´<br />

y − β´<br />

= =<br />

l´<br />

m´<br />

intersections is<br />

α – α´<br />

l<br />

l<br />

β − β´<br />

m<br />

m´<br />

γ – γ´<br />

n<br />

n´<br />

x − α y − β z − γ<br />

= = and<br />

l m n<br />

z − γ´<br />

, then condition <strong>for</strong><br />

n´<br />

= 0<br />

Plane containing the above two lines is<br />

x – α<br />

l<br />

l´<br />

y − β<br />

m<br />

m´<br />

z –<br />

n<br />

n´<br />

γ<br />

= 0<br />

Condition of coplanarity if both the lines are in general<br />

<strong>for</strong>m:<br />

Let the lines be<br />

ax + by + cz + d = 0 = a´x + b´y + c´z + d´<br />

and αx + βy + γz + δ = 0 = α´x + β´y + γ´z + δ´<br />

These are coplanar if<br />

a<br />

a´<br />

α<br />

α´<br />

b<br />

b´<br />

β<br />

β´<br />

c<br />

c´<br />

γ<br />

γ´<br />

d<br />

d´<br />

δ<br />

δ´<br />

= 0<br />

Reduction of non-symmetrical <strong>for</strong>m to symmetrical <strong>for</strong>m:<br />

Let equation of the line in non-symmetrical <strong>for</strong>m be'<br />

a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 z + d 1 = 0; a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 z + d 2 = 0.<br />

To find the equation of the line in symmetrical <strong>for</strong>m,<br />

we must know (i) its direction ratios (ii) coordinates<br />

of any point on it.<br />

Direction ratios : Let l, m, n be the direction ratios<br />

of the line. Since the line lies in both the planes, it<br />

must be perpendicular to normals of both planes. So<br />

a 1 l + b 1 m + c 1 n = 0; a 2 l + b 2 m + c 2 n = 0<br />

From these equations, proportional values of l, m, n<br />

can be found by cross-multiplication as<br />

or<br />

b<br />

l<br />

−<br />

1c2<br />

b2c1<br />

=<br />

c<br />

m<br />

−<br />

1a<br />

2 c2a1<br />

=<br />

a<br />

n<br />

−<br />

1b2<br />

a 2b1<br />

<strong>Point</strong> on the line : Note that as l, m, n cannot be<br />

zero simultaneously, so at least one must be nonzero.<br />

Let a 1 b 2 – a 2 b 1 ≠ 0, then the line cannot be<br />

parallel to xy-plane, so it intersect it. Let it intersect<br />

xy-plane in (x 1 ,y 1 , 0). Then<br />

a 1 x 1 + b 1 y 1 + d 1 = 0 and a 2 x 1 + b 2 y 1 + d 2 = 0<br />

Solving these, we get a point on the line. Then its<br />

equation becomes<br />

x − x1<br />

b c − b c<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1<br />

b1d<br />

2 − b2d<br />

x −<br />

a1b2<br />

− a 2b<br />

b c − b c<br />

1<br />

1<br />

=<br />

y − y<br />

c a − c<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1<br />

2<br />

a<br />

1<br />

=<br />

d1a<br />

2 − d 2a<br />

y −<br />

a1b2<br />

− a 2b<br />

=<br />

c a − c a<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1<br />

1<br />

a<br />

z − 0<br />

1b2<br />

− a 2b1<br />

z − 0<br />

=<br />

a b − a<br />

1 2 2b1<br />

Note : If l ≠ 0, take a point on yz –plane as (0, t 1 , z 1 )<br />

and if m ≠ 0, take a point on xz-plane as (x 1 , 0, z 1 )<br />

Skew lines : The straight lines which are not parallel<br />

and non-coplanar i.e. non-intersecting are called<br />

skew lines.<br />

If ∆ =<br />

x – α<br />

l<br />

l´<br />

y − β<br />

m<br />

m´<br />

z –<br />

n<br />

n´<br />

γ<br />

≠ 0, the lines are skew.<br />

Shortest distance : Suppose the equation of the lines<br />

x − α y − β z − γ<br />

are = =<br />

l m n<br />

and<br />

S.D. =<br />

=<br />

x − α´<br />

=<br />

l´<br />

α – α´<br />

l<br />

l´<br />

y − β´<br />

=<br />

m´<br />

z − γ´<br />

. Then<br />

n´<br />

( α − α´)(mn´<br />

−m´n)<br />

+ ( β − β´)(nl´<br />

−n´<br />

l)(<br />

lm´<br />

−l´m)<br />

β − β´<br />

m<br />

m´<br />

γ – γ´<br />

n<br />

n´<br />

Σ(mn´<br />

−m´n)<br />

Some results <strong>for</strong> plane and straight line:<br />

(i) General equation of a plane :<br />

ax + by + cz + d = 0<br />

where a, b, c are dr's of a normal to this plane.<br />

(ii) Equation of a straight line :<br />

a1x<br />

+ b1y<br />

+ c1z<br />

+ d1<br />

= 0 ⎫<br />

General <strong>for</strong>m :<br />

⎬<br />

a2x<br />

+ b2y<br />

+ c2z<br />

+ d2<br />

= 0⎭<br />

(In fact it is the straight line which is the intersection<br />

of two given planes)<br />

x − x y y z z<br />

Symmetric <strong>for</strong>m :<br />

1 − 1 −<br />

= =<br />

1<br />

a b c<br />

where (x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ) is a point on this line and a, b, c are<br />

its dr's<br />

(iii) Angle between two planes :<br />

If θ be the angle between planes a 1 x + b 1 y c 1 z + d 1 = 0<br />

and a 2 x + b 2 y + c 2 z + d 2 = 0, then<br />

cos θ =<br />

a<br />

2<br />

1<br />

a a<br />

+<br />

1 2<br />

2<br />

b1<br />

+ b b<br />

+ c<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1<br />

+ c c<br />

2<br />

2<br />

a2<br />

1 2<br />

2<br />

b2<br />

+<br />

2<br />

+ c<br />

(In fact angle between two planes is the angle<br />

between their normals.)<br />

Further above two planes are<br />

a1<br />

b1<br />

c1<br />

parallel ⇔ = =<br />

a2<br />

b2<br />

c2<br />

perpendicular ⇔ a 1 a 2 + b 1 b 2 + c 1 c 2 = 0<br />

2<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 49 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


MATHS<br />

PROGRESSION & MATHEMATICAL<br />

INDUCTION<br />

Mathematics Fundamentals<br />

Arithmetic Progression (AP)<br />

AP is a progression in which the difference between<br />

any two consecutive terms is constant. This constant<br />

difference is called common difference (c.d.) and<br />

generally it is denoted by d.<br />

Standard <strong>for</strong>m: Its standard <strong>for</strong>m is<br />

a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) +..........<br />

General term :<br />

T n = a + (n – 1) d<br />

If T n = l then it should be noted that<br />

l − a<br />

l − a<br />

(i) d =<br />

(ii) n = 1+<br />

n −1<br />

d<br />

Note:<br />

a ,b,c are in AP ⇔ 2b = a + c<br />

Sum of n terms of an AP :<br />

S n<br />

=<br />

n<br />

(a<br />

2<br />

+ l)<br />

where l is last term (nth term). Replacing the value of<br />

l, it takes the <strong>for</strong>m<br />

S n<br />

=<br />

n<br />

[2a<br />

2<br />

+ (n −1)d]<br />

Arithmetic Mean :<br />

(i) If A be the AM between two numbers a and b,<br />

1<br />

then A = (a + b)<br />

2<br />

(ii) The AM of n numbers a 1 , a 2 ,..............,a n<br />

= n<br />

1 (a1 + a 2 +........+ a n )<br />

(iii) n AM's between two numbers<br />

If A 1 , A 2 ,....., A n be n AM's between a and b then<br />

a A 1 , A 2 ,....., A n , b is an AP of (n + 2) terms. Its common<br />

difference d is given by<br />

b − a<br />

T n+2 = b = a + (n + 1)d ⇒ d =<br />

n + 1<br />

so A 1 = a + d, A 2 = a + 2d,....., A n = a + nd.<br />

Sum of n AM's between a and b<br />

∴ ΣA n = n(A)<br />

Assuming numbers in AP :<br />

(i) When number of terms be odd<br />

Three terms : a –d, a, a + d<br />

Five terms : a – 2d, a–d, a, a + d, a + 2d<br />

................ ....... ....... ....... .......<br />

(ii) When number of terms be even<br />

Four terms: a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d<br />

Six terms : a –5d, a – 3d, a –d, a + d, a+3d,<br />

a + 5d<br />

............... ........ ...... ...... ...... ......<br />

Geometrical Progression (GP) :<br />

A progression is called a GP if the ratio of its each<br />

term to its previous term is always constant. This<br />

constant ratio is called its common ratio and it is<br />

generally denoted by r.<br />

Standard <strong>for</strong>m : Its standard <strong>for</strong>m is<br />

a + ar + ar 2 +.........<br />

General term : T n = ar n–1<br />

a, b, c are in GP ⇔<br />

b c = ⇔ b 2 = ac<br />

a b<br />

Sum of n terms of a GP :<br />

The sum of n terms of a GP a + ar + ar 2 +....... is<br />

given by<br />

⎧ n<br />

a(1 − r ) a − lr<br />

⎪ = ,when r < 1<br />

S n = ⎨<br />

1−<br />

r 1−<br />

r<br />

n<br />

⎪a(r<br />

−1)<br />

lr<br />

− a<br />

= ,when r > 1<br />

⎪⎩<br />

r −1<br />

r −1<br />

when l = T n .<br />

Sum of an infinite GP :<br />

(i) When r > 1, then r n → ∞, so S n → ∞ Thus when<br />

r > 1, the sum S of infinite GP = ∞<br />

(ii) When | r | < 1, then r n → 0, so<br />

a<br />

S =<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

(iii) When r = 1, then each term is a so S = ∞.<br />

Geometric Mean :<br />

(i) If G be the GM between a and b then<br />

G = ab<br />

(ii) G.M. of n numbers a 1 , a 2 ......, a n = (a 1 a 2 a 3 .....a n ) 1/n<br />

(iii) n GM’s between two numbers<br />

⇒ r = (b/a) 1/n+1<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 50 <strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Product of n GM's between a and b<br />

Product of GM's = (ab) n/2 = G n<br />

Assuming numbers in GP :<br />

(i) When number of terms be odd<br />

Three terms : a/r, a, ar<br />

Five terms : a/r 2 , a/r, a, ar, ar 2<br />

............... .. ..... ..... ..... ..... .....<br />

(ii) When number of terms be even<br />

Four terms : a/r 3 , a/r, ar, ar 3<br />

Six terms : a/r 5 , a/r 3 , a/r, ar, ar 3 , ar 5<br />

Arithmetic-Geometric Progression :<br />

If each term of a progression is the product of the<br />

corresponding terms of an AP and a GP, then it is<br />

called arithmetic-geometric progression (AGP). For<br />

example:<br />

a, (a + d)r, (a + 2d)r 2 .......<br />

T n = [a + (n – 1)d] r n–1<br />

S n =<br />

a<br />

1<br />

n−1<br />

2<br />

dr(1 − r<br />

+<br />

− r (1 − r)<br />

a dr<br />

S ∞ = +<br />

1−<br />

r (1 − r)<br />

2<br />

)<br />

–<br />

[a + (n −1)d]r<br />

1−<br />

r<br />

| r | < 1<br />

Harmonic Progression :<br />

A progression is called a harmonic progression (HP)<br />

if the reciprocals of its terms are in AP.<br />

1 1 1<br />

Standard <strong>for</strong>m : + + +.............<br />

a a + d a + 2d<br />

General term :<br />

T n<br />

1<br />

=<br />

a + (n −1)d<br />

2 1 1 2ac<br />

∴ a, b, c are in HP ⇔ = + ⇔ b =<br />

b a c a + c<br />

Harmonic Mean :<br />

(i) If H be a HM between two numbers a and b, then<br />

2ab<br />

H = or<br />

a + b<br />

2<br />

H<br />

=<br />

1<br />

a<br />

(ii) To find n HM's between a and b we first find n<br />

AM's between 1/a and 1/b, then their reciprocals will<br />

be the required HM's.<br />

Relations between AM, GM and HM :<br />

G 2 = AH<br />

A > G > H, when a, b > 0.<br />

If A and AM and GM respectively between two<br />

positive numbers, then those numbers are<br />

A +<br />

A<br />

2<br />

− G<br />

2<br />

+<br />

1<br />

b<br />

,A −<br />

A<br />

2<br />

− G<br />

Some Important Results :<br />

If number of terms in an AP/GP/HP is odd then<br />

its mid term is the AM/GM/HM between the first<br />

and last term.<br />

2<br />

n<br />

If number of terms in an AP/GP/HP is even the<br />

AM/GM/HM of its two middle terms is equal to<br />

the AM/GM/HM between the first and last term.<br />

a, b, c are in AP, GP and HP ⇔ a = b = c<br />

a, b, c are in AP and HP ⇒ a, b,c are in GP.<br />

a, b, c are in AP<br />

⇔<br />

1 1<br />

,<br />

bc ca<br />

1<br />

,<br />

ab<br />

are in AP. ⇔ bc, ca, ab are in HP.<br />

a, b, c are in GP ⇔ a 2 , b 2 , c 2 are in GP.<br />

a, b, c are in GP ⇔ loga, logb, logc are in AP.<br />

a, b, c are in GP ⇔ log a m log b m, log c m are in HP.<br />

a, b, c d are in GP ⇔ a + b, b + c, c + d are in GP.<br />

a, b, c are in AP ⇔ α a , α b , α c are in GP (α ∈ R 0 )<br />

Principle of Mathematical Induction :<br />

It states that any statement P(n) is true <strong>for</strong> all positive<br />

integral values of n if<br />

(i) P(1) is true i.e., it is true <strong>for</strong> n = 1.<br />

(ii) P(m) is true ⇒ P(m + 1) is also true<br />

i.e., if the statement is true <strong>for</strong> n = m then it must also<br />

be true <strong>for</strong> n = m + 1.<br />

Some Formula based on the Principle of Induction :<br />

n (n + 1)<br />

Σn = 1 + 2 + 3 +....... + n =<br />

2<br />

(Sum of first n natural numbers)<br />

Σ(2n – 1) = 1 + 3 + 5 + ... + (2n – 1) = n 2<br />

(Sum of first n odd numbers)<br />

Σ2n = 2 + 4 + 6 + ...... + 2n = n(n + 1)<br />

(Sum of first n even numbers)<br />

Σn 2 = 1 2 + 2 2 + 3 2 +.......+ n 2 n (n + 1) (2n + 1)<br />

=<br />

6<br />

(Sum of the squares of first n natural numbers)<br />

Σn 3 = 1 3 + 2 3 + 3 3 +.......+ n 3 n (n + 1)<br />

=<br />

4<br />

(Sum of the cubes of first n natural numbers)<br />

Application in Solving Objective Question :<br />

For solving objective question related to natural<br />

numbers we find out the correct alternative by<br />

negative examination of this principle. If the given<br />

statement is P(n), then by putting n = 1, 2, 3, ..... in<br />

P(n), we decide the correct answer.<br />

We also use the above <strong>for</strong>mulae established by this<br />

principle to find the sum of n terms of a given series.<br />

For this we first express T n as a polynomial in n and<br />

then <strong>for</strong> finding S n , we put Σ be<strong>for</strong>e each term of this<br />

polynomial and then use above results of Σn, Σn 2 , Σn 3<br />

etc.<br />

2<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 51 JUNE <strong>2010</strong>


Based on New Pattern<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2011<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> Test Series # 3<br />

Time : 3 Hours<br />

Syllabus : Physics : Calorimetry, K.T.G., Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, Thermal expansion, Transverse wave, Sound<br />

wave, Doppler's effect, Atomic Structure, Radioactivity, X-ray, Nuclear Physics, Matter Waves, Photoelectric Effect,<br />

Practical Physics. Chemistry : Chemical Equilibrium, Acid Base, Ionic Equilibrium, Classification & Nomenclature,<br />

Isomerism , Hydrogen Family, Boron Family & Carbon Family, S-block elements, Nitrogen Family, Oxygen Family,<br />

Halogen Family & Noble Gas, Salt Analysis, Metallurgy, Co-ordination Compounds, Transitional Elements. Mathematics:<br />

<strong>Point</strong>, Straight line, Circle, Parabola, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Vector, 3-D, Probability, Determinants, Matrices.<br />

Instructions :<br />

Section - I<br />

• Question 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +5 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer and<br />

-2 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

Section - II<br />

• Question 7 to 12 are passage based single correct type questions. +3 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer and<br />

-1 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

Section - III<br />

• Question 13 to 14 are Column Match type questions 8 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer and 0 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

Section - IV<br />

• Question 15 to 19 are numerical response questions (with single digit Answer). 3 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer<br />

and 0 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1. The figure shows two isotherms at temperatures T 1<br />

and T 2 . A gas is taken from one isotherm to another<br />

isotherm through different processes. Then change in<br />

internal energy ∆U has relation –<br />

P b<br />

3.<br />

(A)<br />

R<br />

1– γ<br />

R<br />

(B)<br />

γ – 1<br />

(C) R (D) R/2<br />

T<br />

A B C<br />

(a)<br />

x<br />

T<br />

T<br />

A B C<br />

(b)<br />

x<br />

a<br />

c<br />

d<br />

e<br />

T 1<br />

(A) ∆U ab > ∆U ac > ∆U ad > ∆U ac<br />

(B) ∆U ab = ∆U ac > ∆U ad > ∆U ac<br />

(C) ∆U ab = ∆U ac = ∆U ad = ∆U ac<br />

(D) ∆U ab < ∆U ac < ∆U ad < ∆U ac<br />

2. An ideal gas whose adiabatic exponent is γ is<br />

expanded so that the amount of heat transferred to the<br />

gas is equal to the decrease of its internal energy.<br />

Molar heat capacity of the gas <strong>for</strong> this process is -<br />

T 2<br />

V<br />

A B C<br />

(c)<br />

The above graphs shows conduction of heat through<br />

materials A,B,C connected in series. Graph shows<br />

variations of temperature with distnace x-axis. Which<br />

of the above graph are not possible -<br />

(A) a, b, c<br />

(B) a, b<br />

(C) a, c (D) b, c<br />

x<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 52<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


4. Figure shows a rectangular pulse and a triangular<br />

pulse approaching each other along x-axis. The pulse<br />

speed is 0.5 cm/s. What is the resultant displacement<br />

of medium particles due to superposition of waves x<br />

= 0.5 cm and t = 2 sec.<br />

y (cm)<br />

0.5 cm/s 0.5 cm/s<br />

2<br />

–2 –1 0 1 2<br />

(A) 3.5 cm<br />

(B) 2.5 cm<br />

(C) 4 cm (D) 3 cm<br />

1<br />

3<br />

x (cm)<br />

5. Choose the correct statement (s) related to the<br />

photocurrent and the potential difference between the<br />

plate and the collector -<br />

(A) Photocurrent always increase with the increase in<br />

potential difference<br />

(B) when the potential difference is zero, the<br />

photocurrent is also zero<br />

(C) Photocurrent attain a saturation value of some<br />

positive value of the potential difference<br />

(D) None of these<br />

6. Binding energy per nucleon of 1 H 2 and 2He 4 are<br />

1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV respectively. Energy released<br />

in the process 1 H 2 + 1 H 2 = 2He 4 is -<br />

(A) 20.8 MeV (B) 16.6 MeV<br />

(C) 25.2 MeV (D) 23.6 MeV<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

Two parallel plates in vacuum, separated by a small<br />

distance which is small compared with their linear<br />

dimensions, are at temperatures T 1 & T 2 respectively<br />

(T 1 > T 2 ). The plates are black bodies. Another plate<br />

(black body) at temperature T 0 is a kept in between<br />

the two plates.<br />

7. Temperature of the plate kept i.e. T 0 is -<br />

4 4<br />

T1 T2<br />

(A)<br />

+ 4 4<br />

4 T1 – T2<br />

4<br />

= T 0 (B) = T 0<br />

2<br />

2<br />

(C) T 1 T 2 = T 0 (D) 2T 4 1 – T 4 4<br />

2 = T 0<br />

8. Energy absorbed by the plate having temperature T 0 ,<br />

per sec per unit area is -<br />

(A) σ(T 1 4 –T 2 4 )<br />

4<br />

1<br />

(T<br />

(C) σ<br />

4<br />

– T2<br />

)<br />

2<br />

4<br />

1<br />

(T<br />

(B) σ<br />

4<br />

0<br />

(T<br />

(D) σ<br />

4<br />

– T0<br />

)<br />

2<br />

4<br />

– T2<br />

)<br />

2<br />

9. If 'n' black Body plates are placed in between the two<br />

plates having temperature T 1 & T 2 , then the net rate<br />

of emission of radiant energy by first plate is -<br />

σ<br />

(A) 4 (T1 – T 4 σ<br />

2 ) (B)<br />

4 (T1 – T 4 2 )<br />

n n +1<br />

(C) σ<br />

n<br />

n<br />

(T 4 1 – T 4 2 ) (D)<br />

+ 1<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

σ 4 (T1 – T 4 2 )<br />

n – 1<br />

Two hydrogen like atoms A and<br />

equal number of protons and neutrons. The energy<br />

difference between the radiation corresponding to<br />

first Balmer lines emitted A and B is 5.667 eV. When<br />

the atoms A and B moving with the dame velocity,<br />

strikes a heavy target they rebound back with the<br />

same velocity. In this process the atom B imparts<br />

twice the momentum to the target than the A imparts.<br />

10. Ionization energy of Atom B is -<br />

(A) 27.2 eV (B) 13.6 eV<br />

(C) 10.2 eV (D) 54.4 eV<br />

11. Atomic number of atom A is -<br />

(A) 1 (B) 2<br />

(C) 3 (D) 4<br />

12. Mass number of atom B & atom A<br />

(A) 2, 4 (B) 4, 2<br />

(C) 2, 1 (D) 4, 1<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 53<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


13. Match the Column-I with Column-II :<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) An electron moves (P) Total Energy<br />

Potential Energy<br />

in an orbit in a =<br />

2<br />

Bohr atom<br />

(B) As a satellite moves (Q) Kinetic Energy =<br />

in a circular orbit Magnitude of Energy<br />

around total earth<br />

(C) In Ruther<strong>for</strong>d's (R) Motion is under a<br />

α-scattering experiment central <strong>for</strong>ce<br />

as an α-particle moves<br />

in the electric field of<br />

a nucleus<br />

(D) As an object, released (S) Mechanical energy<br />

from some height above is conserved<br />

ground, falls towards<br />

earth, assuming negligible<br />

air resistance<br />

(T) None of these<br />

14. Match the following :<br />

Column-I`<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) Steady state (P) A blackened platinum<br />

wire, when gradually<br />

heated appear first red<br />

and then blue.<br />

(B) Wein's displacement (Q) Radiated power is<br />

law<br />

proportional to fourth<br />

power of absolute<br />

temperature of body<br />

(C) Stefan's law (R) Energy absorbed<br />

is equal to energy<br />

emitted<br />

(D) Black body (S) Absorptive power of<br />

body is unity<br />

(T) None of these<br />

This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

15. Four cylindrical rods of same material with length<br />

and radius (l,r), (2l,r), (2l,2r) and (l,2r) are<br />

connected between two reservoirs at 0ºC and 100ºC.<br />

Find the ratio of the maximum to minimum rate of<br />

conduction in them.<br />

16. Using solar constant S = 20 kilo cal/mm –m 2 and<br />

Joule's constant J = 4.2 J/cal, find the pressure<br />

exerted by sunlight (Ans. in …… × 10 –6 N/m 2 )<br />

17. The minimum intensity of audible sound is 10 –12<br />

W/m 2 sec and density of air is 1.3 kg/m 3 . If the<br />

frequency of sound is 1000 Hz, find the amplitude<br />

(Ans. in …… × 10 –11 m) of vibration [Speed of<br />

sound = 332 ms –1 ]<br />

18. The size of a nucleus is of the order of –14 m.<br />

Calculate the velocity with which protons move<br />

inside the nucleus. The mass of a proton<br />

= 1.675 × 10 –27 kg. [Ans. in …… × 10 7 ms –1 ]<br />

19. Find the change in frequency of red light whose<br />

original frequency is 7.3 × 10 14 Hz when it falls<br />

through 22.5 m losing gravitational potential energy.<br />

[Ans. in …… ×10 3 ]<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1. The optically active tartaric acid is named as D–(+)–<br />

tartaric acid because it has a positive -<br />

(A) optical rotation and is derived from D-glucose<br />

(B) pH in organic solvent<br />

(C) optical rotation and is derived from D–(+)–<br />

glyceraldehyde<br />

(D) optical rotation only when substituted by<br />

deuterium<br />

2. Which of the following compounds is not coloured <br />

(A) Na 2 [CuCl 4 ] (B) Na 2 [CdCl 2 ]<br />

(C) K 4 [Fe(CN) 6 ] (D) K 3 [Fe(CN) 6 ]<br />

3. The brown ring complex compound is <strong>for</strong>mulated as<br />

[Fe(H 2 O) 5 (NO)]SO 4 . The oxidation state of iron is -<br />

(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) 2 (D) 3<br />

4. The following equilibrium is established when HCl is<br />

dissolved the acetic acid,<br />

HCl + CH 3 COOH Cl – + CH 3 COOH 2<br />

+<br />

the set that characterises the conjugate acid-base pairs is-<br />

(A) (HCl, CH 3 COOH) and (Cl – , CH 3 COOH 2 + )<br />

(B) (HCl, CH 3 COOH 2 + ) and (CH 3 COOH, Cl – )<br />

(C) (CH 3 COOH 2 + ) HCl) and (Cl – , CH 3 COOH)<br />

(D) (HCl, Cl – ) and (CH 3 COOH 2 + , CH 3 COOH)<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 54<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


5. Pure ammonia is placed in a vessel at a temperature<br />

where its dissociation constant(α) is appreciable. At<br />

equilibrium -<br />

(A) k p does not change significantly with pressure<br />

(B) does not change with pressure<br />

(C) concentration of NH 3 does not change with<br />

pressure<br />

(D) concentration of hydrogen is less than that of<br />

nitrogen<br />

6. At constant temperature, the equilibrium constant (k p )<br />

<strong>for</strong> the decomposition reaction N 2 O 4 2NO 2 is<br />

expressed by k p = (4x 2 P)/(1–x 2 ), where P = pressure,<br />

x = extent of decomposition. Which one of the<br />

following statement is true <br />

(A) k p increases with increase of P<br />

(B) k p increases with increase of x<br />

(C) k p increases with decrease of x<br />

(D) k p remains constant with change in p and x<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

The IUPAC has set guidelines <strong>for</strong> logical and<br />

methodical naming of organic compounds. The<br />

complex substituents are written in small brackets<br />

and their numbering is done separately. The bivalent<br />

radicals are named by adding 'idene' to the name of<br />

alkyl group. In polyfunctional compounds all lower<br />

priority groups are written in prefix. Now name the<br />

following compounds.<br />

7. CHCHCH 2 OH is -<br />

(CH 3 ) 2 CHOOC<br />

Br<br />

(A) 3-(3'-isopropoxycarbonyl cyclopentylidene<br />

propane-1-ol<br />

(B)3-(2'-bromo-3'-hydroxypropylidene) cyclopentane<br />

carboxylate<br />

(C) Iso-propyl-3-(2'-bromo-3'-hydroxy propylidenyl)<br />

cyclopentane carboxylate<br />

(D) Iso-propyl-3-(2'-bromo-3' hydroxypropylidene)<br />

cyclopentane carboxylate<br />

C 2 H 5<br />

8. CH 3 CH 2 O CH 3 CH 2<br />

is -<br />

(A) 2-(3'-Ethylphenyl)-1-(4'-ethoxyphenyl) ethane<br />

(B) 1-Ethyl-3-(2'-(4''-ethoxyphenyl) ethyl) benzene<br />

(C) 1-(3'-Ethylphenyl)-2-(4'-ethoxylphenyl) ethane<br />

(D) None of these<br />

9.<br />

Cl<br />

O<br />

OH<br />

N<br />

is -<br />

O<br />

(A) 3-chlorocarbonyl-6-(N, N-diethylamino) hex-4-<br />

ene-1-oic acid<br />

(B)4-chlorocarbonyl-3-(N, N-diethylamino) butanoic<br />

acid<br />

(C) 3-chlorocarbonyl-3-(3-N, N-diethylamino prop-<br />

1'-enyl) butane-1-oic acid<br />

(D) 3-chlorocarbonylmethyl-6- (N, N-diethylamino)<br />

hex-4-en-1-oic acid<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

The property of hydrides of p-block elements mostly<br />

depend on<br />

(i) Electronegatively difference between central atom<br />

and hydrogen<br />

(ii) Size of central atom<br />

(iii) Number of valence electrons in central atom. some<br />

undergo hydride in which central atom is less<br />

electronegative, react with OH – to given hydrogen<br />

while acidic property of hydride in a period depends<br />

on electronegativity of central atom i.e. more<br />

electronegative is the atom, more acidic is hydride. In<br />

a group, acidic property is proportional to size of<br />

central atom.<br />

Some electron deficient hydride behaves as lewis<br />

acid while only one hydride of an element in p-plock<br />

behaves as lewis base with lone pair of electrons.<br />

Hydrides in which central atom's electronegativity to<br />

close to hydrogen has no reaction with water.<br />

10. The hydride which do not react with water is -<br />

(A) NH 3 (B) PH 3 (C) B 2 H 6 (D) AsH 3<br />

11. Which one undergoes spontaneous combustion with<br />

exposure to air <br />

(A) PH 3 (B) P 2 H 4 (C) N 2 H 4 (D) NH 3<br />

12. Which one is strongest base <br />

(A) OH – (B) HS – (C) HSe – (D) HTe –<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R<br />

P Q R<br />

P Q R<br />

P Q R<br />

S T<br />

S T<br />

S T<br />

S T<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 55<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

13. Match the extraction processes listed in Column-I<br />

with metals listed in Column-II :<br />

Column-I Column-II<br />

(A) Self reduction (P) Lead<br />

(B) Carbon reduction (Q) Silver<br />

(C) Complex <strong>for</strong>mation (R) Copper<br />

and displacement by<br />

metal<br />

(D) Decomposition of (S) Boron<br />

iodide<br />

(T) Au<br />

14. Match statements in Column-I with appropriate<br />

solution in Column-II<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) A solution having (P) 5M HCl<br />

pH less then 7<br />

(B) A solution having (Q) 1M NaCl<br />

pH more than 7<br />

(C) A solution having (R) 0.1 M Na 2 CO 3<br />

pH almost equal to 7<br />

(D) solution having (S) 0.1 M CaCl 2<br />

negative value of pH<br />

(T) 1M H 2 SO 4<br />

This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

15. A solution is prepared by mixing 50 mL 0.1 M HCl<br />

with 50 mL 2.9 M CH 3 CH 2 COOH and 100 mL 0.2<br />

M CH 3 CH 2 COONa. Find pH of the resulting<br />

solution. K a <strong>for</strong> CH 3 CH 2 COOH is 1 × 10 –5 .<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

16. Calculate the change in pressure (in atm) when 2<br />

mole of NO and 16 gram O 2 in a 6.25 litre originally<br />

at 27ºC react to produce the maximum quantity of<br />

NO 2 possible according to the equation –<br />

2NO(g) + O 2 (g) → 2NO 2 (g)<br />

(Take R = 12<br />

1 ltr. Atm/mol-K)<br />

17. the number of isomers <strong>for</strong> the compound with<br />

molecular <strong>for</strong>mula C 2 BrCIFI is.<br />

18. In P 4 O 10 each P atom is linked with ...........O atoms.<br />

19. 0.15 mole of Pyridinium chloride has been added<br />

into 500 cm 3 of 0.2 M pyridine solution. Calculate pH<br />

(K b <strong>for</strong> pyridine = 1.5 × 10 –9 M)<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1.<br />

⎡ 0 α α ⎤<br />

If A =<br />

⎢<br />

⎥<br />

⎢<br />

2β<br />

β – β<br />

⎥<br />

⎢⎣<br />

γ – γ γ ⎥⎦<br />

is an orthogonal matrix, then<br />

the number of possible triplets (α,β,γ) is -<br />

(A) 8 (B) 6<br />

(C) 4 (D) 2<br />

n<br />

2. If ∑ αn = an 2 + + bn, where a, b are constants and<br />

n=<br />

1<br />

α 1 , α 2 , α 3 ∈ {1, 2, 3........9} and 25α 1 , 37α 2 , 49α 3 be<br />

⎡ α1<br />

α2<br />

α3<br />

⎤<br />

three digit number then<br />

⎢<br />

⎥<br />

⎢<br />

5 7 9<br />

⎥<br />

is<br />

⎢⎣<br />

25α1<br />

37α2<br />

49α3⎥⎦<br />

equal to -<br />

(A) α 1 + α 2 + α 3 (B) α 1 – α 2 + α 3<br />

(C) 7 (D) 0<br />

3. Consider the matrix A, B, C, D with order 2 × 3,<br />

3 × 4, 4 × 4, 4 × 2 respectively. Let x = (αABγC 2 D) 3<br />

where α & γ are scalars. Let |x| = k|ABC 2 D| 3 , then k<br />

is -<br />

(A) αγ (B)α 2 γ 2<br />

(C) α 4 γ 4 (D) α 6 γ 6<br />

4. Three numbers are selected at random from the set<br />

{1, 2, 3...........N}, one by one without replacement. If<br />

the first number is known to be smaller than second,<br />

then the probability that third selected number lies<br />

between the first two numbers is -<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 56<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


(A) 2<br />

1<br />

(B) 3<br />

1<br />

(C) 6<br />

1<br />

(D) 8<br />

1<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

consider the equation of two straight lines<br />

5. A bag 'A' contains 2 white and 3 red balls, another<br />

bag 'B' contains 4 white and 5 red balls. If one ball is<br />

drawn at random from one of the bag and it is found<br />

to be red, the probability that it was drawn from the<br />

bag B is -<br />

89<br />

(A) 245<br />

25<br />

(B) 52<br />

93<br />

(C) 256<br />

24<br />

(D) 663<br />

6. Vectors → a , → b and → c with magnitude 2, 3 & 4<br />

→<br />

respectively are coplanar. A unit vector d is<br />

perpendicular to all of them. If ( → a × → b ) × ( → c × → d ) =<br />

^<br />

i j^<br />

k^<br />

– + and the angle between → a and → b is 30º,<br />

6 3 3<br />

then<br />

(A) 3<br />

5<br />

→ → →<br />

c .^i + c .<br />

^j + c .<br />

^k is equal to -<br />

(B) 9<br />

5<br />

(C) 12<br />

5<br />

(D) 18<br />

5<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

There are four boxes A 1 , A 2 , A 3 and A 4 . Box A i has i<br />

cards and on each card a number is printed, the<br />

numbers are from 1 to i, A box is selected randomly,<br />

1<br />

the probability of selection of box A i is and then 10<br />

a card is drawn. Let E i represents the event that a card<br />

with number 'i' is drawn.<br />

7. P(E 1 ) is equal to -<br />

1 1<br />

(A) (B) 5 10<br />

8. P(A 3 /E 2 ) is equal to -<br />

1 1<br />

(A) (B) 4 3<br />

(C) 5<br />

2<br />

(C) 2<br />

1<br />

(D) 4<br />

1<br />

(D) 3<br />

2<br />

9. Expectation of the number on the card is -<br />

(A) 2 (B) 2.5 (C) 3 (D) 3.5<br />

→<br />

r = 3 ^i + 5 ^j + 7 ^k + λ( ^i – 2 ^j + ^k ) and<br />

x +1 y + 1 z + 1<br />

= = .<br />

7 – 6 1<br />

10. The equation of the line of shortest distance between<br />

the given lines is -<br />

(A) → r = ( 3<br />

^i + 5<br />

^j + 7<br />

^k ) – δ( ^i + ^j + ^k )<br />

(B) → r = ( ^i +<br />

^j + ^k ) + δ(3 ^i + 5^j + 7 ^k )<br />

(C) → r = ( 3<br />

^i + 5<br />

^j + 7<br />

^k ) – δ(4 ^i + 6 ^j + 8 ^k )<br />

(D) → r = ( 4<br />

^i + 6<br />

^j + 8<br />

^k ) – δ( ^i + ^j + ^k )<br />

11. The length of shortest distance between the lines is -<br />

(A) 29 (B) 2 29<br />

(C) 3 29 (D) 4 29<br />

12. The point of intersection of the lines is -<br />

⎛ –10 53 – 4 ⎞ ⎛10<br />

– 53 4 ⎞<br />

(A) ⎜ , , ⎟ (B) ⎜ , , ⎟<br />

⎝ 3 3 3 ⎠ ⎝ 3 3 3 ⎠<br />

(C) (–10, 53, –4) (D) None of these<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

13. Match the following :<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) Through (γ, γ + 1) there (P) 2 < γ < 8<br />

can not be more than one<br />

normal to parabola y 2 = 4x if<br />

(B) If two cicles (x–1) 2 + (y–1) 2 = γ 2 (Q) – 2 < γ < 2<br />

and x 2 + y 2 – 8x + 2y + 8 = 0<br />

intersect at two points, then<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 57<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


(C) <strong>Point</strong> (γ, γ + 1) lies inside the (R) γ < – 2<br />

circle x 2 + y 2 = 1 <strong>for</strong><br />

(D) Both equation x 2 + y 2 + 2γx + 4 = 0 (S) – 1 < γ < 0<br />

and x 2 + y 2 – 4γy + 8 = 0 represent<br />

real circles if<br />

(T) γ > 8<br />

⎡3<br />

– 4⎤<br />

⎡1/<br />

2 3⎤<br />

14. Consider the matrix A = ⎢ ⎥ ; B =<br />

⎣1<br />

–1<br />

⎢ ⎥ .<br />

⎦ ⎣ 0 1 ⎦<br />

Let P be an orthogonal matrix and Q = PAP T ,<br />

R k = P T Q k .P, S = PBP T & T k = P T S k P where k ∈ N<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

5<br />

(A) ∑ a k , where a k represents the element (P) –9<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

of first row & first column in matrix R k<br />

3<br />

(B) ∑ b k , where b k represents the element (Q) 10<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

of second row & second column in<br />

matrix R k<br />

∞<br />

(C) ∑ X , where X k represents the element (R) 35<br />

k=1<br />

k<br />

of first row & first column in matrix T k<br />

10<br />

(D) ∑ y k , where y k represents the element (S) 1<br />

k=<br />

1<br />

of second row and second column in<br />

Matrix T K<br />

(T) 15<br />

15. There are N + 1 identical boxes each containing N<br />

wall clocks. The first box contains zero defective<br />

clocks. The second box contains one defective and<br />

(N – 1) effective clocks, in general r th box contains<br />

(r – 1) defective and (N – r + 1) effective clocks<br />

(1 ≤ r ≤ N + 1). Thus, the (N + 1) th box contains all<br />

defective clocks. A wall clock is selected and found<br />

an effective one. The probability that it is from k th<br />

γN – γK<br />

+ γ<br />

box is<br />

find γ.<br />

N<br />

2 + N<br />

16. If a determinant of order 3 × 3 is <strong>for</strong>med by using the<br />

numbers 1 or – 1then it minimum value of<br />

determinant is – γ find the value of γ.<br />

17. If equation of the plane through the straight line<br />

x –1 y + 2 z<br />

= = and perpendicular to the plane<br />

2 – 3 5<br />

x – y + z + 2 = 0 ia ax – by + cz + 4 = 0, then find the<br />

3 2<br />

10 a + 10 b + 10c<br />

value of<br />

.<br />

342<br />

⎡3<br />

– 2<br />

18. If A =<br />

⎢<br />

⎢<br />

2 1<br />

⎢⎣<br />

4 – 3<br />

⎡3<br />

0 3⎤<br />

⎡x⎤<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎢<br />

2 1 0<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎥ ⎢<br />

y<br />

⎥<br />

⎢⎣<br />

4 0 2⎥⎦<br />

⎢⎣<br />

z⎥⎦<br />

y z<br />

of x + + 2 3<br />

3 ⎤<br />

–1<br />

⎥<br />

⎥<br />

. Solve the system of equations<br />

2 ⎥⎦<br />

⎡8⎤<br />

⎡2y⎤<br />

=<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎢<br />

1<br />

⎥<br />

+<br />

⎢ ⎥<br />

⎢<br />

z<br />

⎥<br />

, then find the value<br />

⎢⎣<br />

4⎥⎦<br />

⎢⎣<br />

3y⎥⎦<br />

This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

19. Find the coefficient of x in the determinant<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

a1b1<br />

a2b1<br />

a3b1<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

a1b2<br />

a2b2<br />

a3b2<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

(1 + x)<br />

a1b3<br />

a2b3<br />

a3b3<br />

where a i , b j ∈N<br />

How to Handle Difficult People<br />

A bully at your work is difficult <strong>for</strong> you to face. He is<br />

demanding you do part of his job without pay or<br />

credit. How do you handle it<br />

Your neighbors are constantly fighting. They wake<br />

you up in the middle of the night with their screams<br />

and curses. What do you say to them<br />

Your father is unhappy about your career choice. He<br />

constantly criticizes your work and points out what<br />

he thinks you should do. How do you deal with him<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 58<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Based on New Pattern<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 2012<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> Test Series # 3<br />

Time : 3 Hours<br />

Syllabus : Physics : Calorimetry, K.T.G.,Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, Thermal expansion, Transverse wave,<br />

Sound wave, Doppler's effect. Chemistry : Chemical Equilibrium, Acid Base, Ionic Equilibrium, Classification &<br />

Nomenclature, Isomerism , Hydrogen Family, Boron Family & Carbon Family, S-block elements. Mathematics:<br />

<strong>Point</strong>, Straight line, Circle, Parabola, Ellipse, Hyperbola, Vector, 3-D<br />

Instructions :<br />

Section - I<br />

• Question 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +5 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer<br />

and -2 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

Section - II<br />

• Question 7 to 12 are passage based single correct type questions. +3 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer and<br />

-1 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

Section - III<br />

• Question 13 to 14 are Column Match type questions 8 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer and 0 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong<br />

answer.<br />

Section - IV<br />

• Question 15 to 19 are numerical response questions (with single digit Answer). 3 marks will be awarded <strong>for</strong> correct answer<br />

and 0 mark <strong>for</strong> wrong answer.<br />

PHYSICS<br />

(A) 52 W<br />

(C) 512 W<br />

(B) 256 W<br />

(D) 215 W<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1. The molar heat capacity <strong>for</strong> a process is :<br />

R α<br />

C = + , then process equation is -<br />

1– γ T<br />

(A) Ve –(α/RT)T = constant<br />

(B) Ve (α/R)T = constant<br />

(C) VT = constant<br />

(D) Ve α/RT = constant<br />

2. Three black bodies 1,2,3 have radius r 1 < r 2 < r 3 .<br />

Emissive powers of black bodies at Temperature T<br />

are E 1 , E 2 , E 3 , Then correct relation between them is -<br />

(A) E 1 < E 2 < E 3 (B) E 1 > E 2 > E 3<br />

(C) E 1 = E 2 = E 3 (D) E 1 > E 2 < E 3<br />

3. A taut string <strong>for</strong> which µ = 5 × 10 –2 kg/m is under<br />

tension of 80 N. How much is the average rate of<br />

transport of potential energy if the frequency is 60 Hz<br />

and amplitude 6 cm - (Given 4π 2 = 39.5)<br />

4. In case of standing waves -<br />

(A) At nodes particles displacement is time<br />

dependent<br />

(B) At antinodes displacement of particle may or<br />

may not be zero<br />

(C) Wave does not travel but energy is transmitted<br />

(D) Components waves traveling in same direction<br />

having same amplitude and same frequency are<br />

superimposed<br />

5. For an ideal gas graph is shown <strong>for</strong> three processes.<br />

Processes 1, 2 and 3 are respectively –<br />

Work done (magnitude)<br />

1<br />

Temperature change<br />

(A) Isochoric, isobaric, adiabatic<br />

(B) Isochoric, adiabatic, isobaric<br />

(C) isobaric, adiabatic, isochoric<br />

(D) Adiabatic, isobaric, isochoric<br />

3<br />

2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 59<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


6. Figure shows cyclic process. From c to b, 40 J is<br />

transferred as heat from b to a, 130 J is transferred as<br />

heat, and work done is 80 J from a to c, 400 J is<br />

transferred as heat then –<br />

P<br />

c<br />

a<br />

V<br />

(A) Work done in process a to c is 310 J<br />

(B) Net work done is cycle is 230<br />

(C) Net change in internal energy in cycle is 130 J<br />

(D) None of these<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

Many wave<strong>for</strong>ms are described in terms of<br />

combinations of travelling waves. Superposition<br />

principle is used to analyse such wave combinations.<br />

Two pulses travelling on same string are described<br />

by-<br />

5<br />

y 1 =<br />

(3x – 4t)<br />

2 + 2<br />

, y –5<br />

2 =<br />

(3x + 4t – 6)<br />

2 + 2<br />

7. The direction in which each pulse is travelling is -<br />

(A) y 1 is in positive x-axis, y 2 is in positive x-axis<br />

(B) y 1 is in negative x-axis, y 2 is in negative x-axis<br />

(C) y 1 is in positive x-axis, y 2 is in negative x-axis<br />

(D) y 1 is in negative x-axis, y 2 is in positive x-axis<br />

8. The time when the two waves cancel everywhere -<br />

(A) 1 sec (B) 0.5 sec (C) 0.25 sec (D) 0.75 sec<br />

9. The point where two waves always cancel-<br />

(A) 0.25 m (B) 0.5 m (C) 0.75 m (D) 1 m<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

One mole of monoatomic gas is taken through above<br />

cyclic process. T A = 300 K<br />

Process AB is defined as PT = constant<br />

P<br />

B C<br />

3P 0<br />

P 0<br />

T<br />

10. Work done in process AB is -<br />

(A) 400 R<br />

(B) – 400 R<br />

(C) 200 R<br />

(D) – 300 R<br />

b<br />

11. Change in internal energy in process CA<br />

(A) 900 R<br />

(B) 300 R<br />

(C) 1200 R<br />

(D) zero<br />

12. Heat transferred in the process BC is -<br />

(A) 1000 R (B) 500 R<br />

(C) 2000 R<br />

(D) 1500 R<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

13. Match the standing waves <strong>for</strong>med in column-II due to<br />

plane progressive waves in Column-I and also with<br />

conditions in Column-I<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) Incident wave is (P) y = 2A cos kx sin ωt<br />

y = A sin (kx – ωt)<br />

(B) Incident wave is (Q) y = 2A sin kx cos ωt<br />

y = A cos (kx – ωt)<br />

(C) x = 0 is rigid support (R) y = 2A sin kx cos ωt<br />

(D) x = 0 is flexible support (S) y = 2A cos kx cos ωt<br />

(T) None of these<br />

14. Column-I Column-II<br />

(A) Specific heat capacity S (P) l 1 – l 2 = constant<br />

<strong>for</strong> l 1 α 1 = l 2 α 2<br />

(B) Two metals (l 1 , α 1 ) and (Q) Y is same<br />

(l 2 , α 2 ) are heated uni<strong>for</strong>mly<br />

(C) Thermal stress (R) S = ∞ <strong>for</strong> ∆T = 0<br />

(D) Four wires of same (S) Y α ∆t<br />

material<br />

(T) None of these<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 60<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

15. If the volume of a block of metal changes by 0.12 %<br />

when heat is changed from 40ºC to 60ºC, find the<br />

linear expansion coefficient of the metal <br />

[Ans. in …… × 10 –5 /ºK]<br />

16. Calculate the pressure exerted by a mixture of 8 g of<br />

oxygen, 14 g of nitrogen and 22 g of carbon di-oxide<br />

in a container of 30 litres at a temperature of 27ºC.<br />

[Ans. in …… × 10 5 N/m 2 ]<br />

17. A sphere and a cube of same material and total<br />

surface area placed in an evacuated chamber turn by<br />

turn and heated to the same temperature. Calculate<br />

the ratio of the rate of cooling of spherical to cubical<br />

surface. [Ans. in …… × 10 –1 ]<br />

18. Two oscillating waves have a phase difference of 2<br />

π<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

is 25 oscillations. What is the percentage difference<br />

in their frequency <br />

19. For a certain organ pipe, three successive resonance<br />

observed are 425, 595 and 765 Hz. Taking the speed<br />

of sound to be 340 ms –1 , find the length of the pipe,<br />

in metre.<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1. The IUPAC name of the given compound<br />

OHC CONH 2<br />

| |<br />

CH 3 –CH–CH–CH–CH–COOH is -<br />

|<br />

|<br />

Br COCl<br />

(A) 2-Bromo-4-carbamoyl-5-chloro<strong>for</strong>myl-3-<strong>for</strong>myl<br />

hexanoic acid<br />

(B) 5-Bromo-3-carbamoyl-2-chloro<strong>for</strong>myl-4-<strong>for</strong>myl<br />

hexanoic<br />

(C) 4-Formyl-2-chloro<strong>for</strong>myl-3-carbamoyl-5-bromo<br />

hexanoic acid<br />

(D) 2-Chloro<strong>for</strong>myl-3-carbamoyl-4-<strong>for</strong>myl-5-bromo<br />

hexanoic acid<br />

2. Geometry in the given compound is<br />

CH 3<br />

H<br />

H<br />

CH 3<br />

(A) cis<br />

(B) trans<br />

(C) cis as well as trans (D) no geometrical isomerism<br />

3. The structure of spiro [3,3] heptane is -<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

(C)<br />

(D)<br />

4. The pH of a 10 –8 molar solution of HCl in water is -<br />

(A) 8 (B) – 8<br />

(C) between 7 and 8 (D) between 6 and 7<br />

5. Consider the following equilibrium in a closed<br />

container N 2 O 4 (g) 2NO 2 (g). At a fixed<br />

temperature, the volume of the reaction container is<br />

halved. For this change, which of the following<br />

statements holds true regarding the equilibrium<br />

constant (k p ) and degree of dissociation (α) <br />

(A) neither k p nor α changes<br />

(B) both k p and α change<br />

(C) k p changes, but α does not change<br />

(D) k p does not change, but α changes<br />

6. For H 3 PO 3 and H 3 PO 4 the correct choice is -<br />

(A) H 3 PO 3 is dibasic and reducing<br />

(B) H 3 PO 3 is dibasic and non-reducing<br />

(C) H 3 PO 4 is tribasic and reducing<br />

(D) H 3 PO 3 is tribasic and non-reducing<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 61<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

In a reversible chemical reaction, the rate of <strong>for</strong>ward<br />

reaction decreases and that of backward reaction<br />

increases with the passage of time; at equilibrium the<br />

rate of <strong>for</strong>ward and backward reaction become same.<br />

Let us consider the <strong>for</strong>mation of SO 3 (g) in the<br />

following reversible reaction :<br />

2SO 2 (g) + O 2 (g) 2SO 3 (g)<br />

Following graphs are plotted <strong>for</strong> this reactions<br />

Conc.<br />

t 1 t 2 t 3<br />

time<br />

t 4<br />

A.<br />

B.<br />

C.<br />

7. In the above graph, A,B & C respectively are -<br />

(A) SO 3 , SO 2 and O 2 (B) SO 3 , O 2 and SO 2<br />

(C) SO 2 , O 2 and SO 3 (D) O 2 , SO 2 and SO 3<br />

8. In the above graph, the equilibrium state is attained at<br />

time -<br />

(A) t 1 (B) t 2<br />

(C) t 3 (D) t 4<br />

9. Which of the following represent the rates of <strong>for</strong>ward<br />

reaction (r f ) and rates of backward reaction (r b ) at<br />

equilibrium <br />

(A)<br />

(C)<br />

rate of<br />

reaction<br />

rate of<br />

reaction<br />

r b<br />

r f<br />

time<br />

r f<br />

r b<br />

time<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

(B)<br />

(D)<br />

rate of<br />

reaction<br />

rate of<br />

reaction<br />

time<br />

time<br />

Different spatial arrangements of the atoms that result<br />

from restricted rotation about a single bond are<br />

con<strong>for</strong>mers. n-Butane has four con<strong>for</strong>mers eclipsed,<br />

fully eclipsed, gauche and anti. The stability order of<br />

these con<strong>for</strong>mers are as follows:<br />

anti > gauche > partial eclipsed > fully eclipsed<br />

Although anti is more stable than gauche but in some<br />

cases gauche is more stable than anti.<br />

r b<br />

r b<br />

r f<br />

r f<br />

10. Which one of the following is most stable<br />

con<strong>for</strong>mer<br />

Cl<br />

Cl<br />

CH 3 H Cl CH 3<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

H CH<br />

H<br />

3<br />

CH 3<br />

Cl<br />

H<br />

Cl<br />

Cl<br />

H Cl<br />

Cl<br />

(C)<br />

H<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

(D)<br />

H<br />

H<br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

11. Which one of the following is the most stable<br />

con<strong>for</strong>mer <br />

CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

HO H H CH 3<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

H<br />

OH<br />

H<br />

OH<br />

CH 3 OH<br />

CH 3<br />

OH<br />

H OH H CH 3<br />

(C)<br />

H OH<br />

(D)<br />

H CH 3<br />

CH 3<br />

OH<br />

12. Number of possible con<strong>for</strong>mers of n-butane is -<br />

(A) 2 (B) 4<br />

(C) 6 (D) infinite<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 62<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


13. Match the following :<br />

Column-I<br />

(A) N 2(g) + 3H 2(g) 2NH 3(g) ; ∆H = –ve<br />

(B) N 2(g) + O 2(g) 2NO (g) ; ∆H = +ve<br />

(C) A (g) + B (g) 2C (g) + D (g) ; ∆H = +ve<br />

(D) PCl 5(g) PCl 3(g) + Cl 2(g) ; ∆H = +ve<br />

Column-II<br />

(P) K increases with increase in temperature<br />

(Q) K decreases with increase in temperature<br />

(R) Pressure has no effect<br />

(S) Product concentration, increases due to addition<br />

of inert gas at constant pressure<br />

(T) Product concentration, increases due to addition<br />

of inert gas at constant volume<br />

14. Match the following :<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) Bi 3+ → (BiO) + (P) Heat<br />

(B) [AlO 2 ] – → Al(OH) 3 (Q) Hydrolysis<br />

(C) [SiO 4 ] 4– → [Si 2 O 7 ] 6– (R) Acidification<br />

(D) [B 4 O 7 ] 2– → [B(OH) 3 ] (S) Dilution by water<br />

(T) Basification<br />

This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

15. Calculate the pH at which the following conversion<br />

(reaction) will be at equilibrium in basic medium<br />

I 2 (s) I – (aq.) + IO – 3 (aq.)<br />

When the equilibrium concentrations at 300 K are [I – ]<br />

= 0.10 M and [IO – 3 ] = 0.10 M.<br />

{Given → ∆G f º (I – , aq.) = – 50 kJ./mol,<br />

∆G f º (IO – 3 , aq) = – 123.5 KJ/mol,<br />

∆G f º (H 2 O, l) = –233 KJ/mol<br />

∆G f º (OH – , aq.) = – 150 KJ/mol<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

25<br />

R(Gas constant) = J/mol–K<br />

3<br />

Log e = 2.3}<br />

16. Number of configurational isomers of 2,3-<br />

dibromocinnamic acid is .<br />

17. Consider the reaction AB 2(g) AB g + B (g) . It the<br />

initial pressure of AB 2 is 100 torr and equilibrium<br />

pressure is 120 torr. The equilibrium constant Kp in<br />

terms of torr is.<br />

18. Dissociation of H 3 PO 3 occurs in ......... stages.<br />

19. The number of hydroxyl groups in pyrophosphoric<br />

acid is.<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Questions 1 to 6 are multiple choice questions. Each<br />

question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of<br />

which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in<br />

OMR sheet against the question number of that<br />

question. + 5 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct<br />

answer and – 2 mark <strong>for</strong> each wrong answer.<br />

1. A circle C 1 of radius b touches the circle x 2 + y 2 = a 2<br />

externally and has its centre on the positive x-axis;<br />

another circle C 2 of radius c touches the circle C 1<br />

externally and has its centre on the positive x-axis.<br />

Given a < b < c, then the three circles have a<br />

common tangent if a, b, c are in -<br />

(A) A.P.<br />

(B) G.P.<br />

(C) H.P. (D) None of these<br />

2. P is a point on the axis of the parabola y 2 = 4ax;<br />

Q and R are the extremities of its latus rectum, A is<br />

its vertex. If PQR is an equilateral triangle lying<br />

within the parabola and ∠AQP = θ, then cos θ =<br />

2 – 3<br />

9<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

2 5<br />

8 5<br />

(C)<br />

5 – 2<br />

2<br />

3<br />

(D) None of these<br />

x 2 y 2<br />

3. The length of the diameter of the ellipse + = 1,<br />

25 9<br />

perpendicular to the asymptote of the hyperbola<br />

x 2 y 2<br />

– = 1 passing through the first and third<br />

16 9<br />

quadrants is :<br />

100<br />

150<br />

(A)<br />

(B)<br />

431<br />

481<br />

(C)<br />

25<br />

3<br />

(D) 11 2<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 63<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


→ → → → → →<br />

4. If a , b , c are such that [ a , b , c ] = 1,<br />

→ → → → →<br />

2π<br />

→ →<br />

c = γ( a × b ), a ^ b < , and | a | = 2 , | b |<br />

3<br />

= 3 , | → c | =<br />

is -<br />

π<br />

(A) 6<br />

1<br />

→ →<br />

, then the angle between a and b<br />

3<br />

(B) 4<br />

π<br />

(C) 3<br />

π<br />

(D) 2<br />

π<br />

5. Equation of a plane which passes through the point of<br />

x –1 y – 2 z – 3<br />

intersection of lines = = and<br />

3 1 2<br />

x – 3 y –1 z – 2<br />

= = and at greatest distance<br />

1 2 3<br />

from the point (0, 0, 0) is -<br />

(A) 4x + 3y + 5z = 25<br />

(B) 4x + 3y + 5z = 50<br />

(C) 3x + 4y + 5z = 49<br />

(D) x + 7y – 5z = 2<br />

6. p 1 , p 2 are lengths of perpendicular from foci on<br />

tangent to ellipse and p 3 , p 4 are perpendiculars from<br />

extremities of major axis and p from centre of ellipse<br />

p1p2<br />

– p<br />

on same tangent, then equals -<br />

2<br />

p3p4<br />

– p<br />

(A) e (B) e<br />

(C) e 2<br />

(D) None of these<br />

This section contains 2 paragraphs, each has 3 multiple<br />

choice questions. (Questions 7 to 12) Each question has<br />

4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE<br />

is correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against<br />

the question number of that question. + 3 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and – 1 mark <strong>for</strong> each<br />

wrong answer.<br />

Passage : I (Ques. 7 to 9)<br />

Let C : x 2 + y 2 x 2<br />

= 9, E : +<br />

9 4<br />

= 1, L : y = 2x<br />

7. P is a point on the circle C, the perpendicular PQ to<br />

the major axis of the ellipse E meets the ellipse at M,<br />

then<br />

MQ is equal to -<br />

PQ<br />

(A) 1/3 (B) 2/3<br />

(C) 1/2 (D) none of these<br />

8. If L represents the line joining the point P on C to its<br />

centre O, then equation of the tangent at M to the<br />

ellipse E is -<br />

(A) x + 3y = 3 5 (B) 4x + 3y = 5<br />

(C) x + 3y + 5 = 0 (D) 4x +3y + 5 = 0<br />

2<br />

y 2<br />

9. Equation of the diameter of the ellipse E conjugate to<br />

the diameter represented by L is -<br />

(A) 9x + 2y = 0 (B) 2x + 9y = 0<br />

(C) 4x + 9y = 0 (D) 4x – 9y = 0<br />

Passage: II (Ques. 10 to 12)<br />

In a parallelogram OABC vector → a , → b , → c are<br />

respectively the position vectors of vertices A, B, C<br />

with reference to O as origin. A point E is taken on<br />

the side BC which divides it in the ratio of 2 : 1. Also<br />

the line segment AE intersects the line besecting the<br />

angle O internally in point P. If CP when extended<br />

meets AB in point F, then<br />

10. The position vector of point P, is -<br />

→ →<br />

⎛<br />

→ →<br />

⎞<br />

3 | a || c | ⎜ a c ⎟<br />

(A)<br />

⎜ +<br />

→ → → → ⎟<br />

3 | c | + 2 | a |<br />

⎝ | a | | c | ⎠<br />

(B)<br />

→ →<br />

⎛<br />

→ →<br />

⎞<br />

| a || c | ⎜ a c ⎟<br />

⎜ +<br />

→ → → → ⎟<br />

3 | c | + 2 | a |<br />

⎝ | a | | c | ⎠<br />

→ →<br />

⎛<br />

→ →<br />

⎞<br />

2 | a || c | ⎜ a c ⎟<br />

(C)<br />

⎜ +<br />

→ → → → ⎟<br />

3 | c | + 2 | a |<br />

⎝ | a | | c | ⎠<br />

(D) none of these<br />

11. The position vector of point F is -<br />

→<br />

→<br />

1 | a |<br />

→<br />

(A) a +<br />

→ c (B)<br />

3<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

→<br />

2 | a |<br />

→<br />

(C) a +<br />

→ c (D)<br />

| c |<br />

12. The vector → AF , is given by -<br />

(A)<br />

→<br />

1 | a |<br />

→<br />

c<br />

→<br />

3<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

(B)<br />

| a |<br />

→<br />

(C) 2 c (D)<br />

→<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

a +<br />

→<br />

| a |<br />

→<br />

→ c<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

→<br />

| a |<br />

→<br />

a – c<br />

→<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

| a |<br />

→<br />

c<br />

→<br />

| c |<br />

→<br />

| a |<br />

→<br />

– c<br />

→<br />

| c |<br />

This section contains 2 questions (Questions 13, 14).<br />

Each question contains statements given in two<br />

columns which have to be matched. Statements (A, B,<br />

C, D) in Column I have to be matched with statements<br />

(P, Q, R, S, T) in Column II. The answers to these<br />

questions have to be appropriately bubbled as<br />

illustrated in the following example. If the correct<br />

matches are A-P, A-S, A-T; B-Q, B-R; C-P, C-Q and D-<br />

S, D-T then the correctly bubbled 4 × 5 matrix should<br />

be as follows :<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 64<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

P Q R S T<br />

Mark your response in OMR sheet against the question<br />

number of that question in section-II. + 8 marks will be<br />

given <strong>for</strong> complete correct answer (i.e. +2 marks <strong>for</strong><br />

each correct row) and NO NEGATIVE MARKING <strong>for</strong><br />

wrong answer.<br />

13.<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) If lines x + 2y – 1 = 0, ax + y + 3 = 0 (P) 4<br />

and bx – y + 2 = 0 are concurrent,<br />

the least distance from origin to<br />

(a, b) is S. The value of 58 . S is<br />

(B) A,B are two fixed points on a line (Q) 5<br />

L. Let locus of point P such that<br />

PA = 2PB be a curve cutting line<br />

L at R and S. If slope of PR is – 2<br />

1 ,<br />

then slope of PS is<br />

(C) Let tangents at P and Q to curve (R) 2<br />

y 2 – 4x – 2y + 5 = 0 intersect at T.<br />

If S(2, 1) is a point such that<br />

SP.QS = 16 then the length ST is<br />

(D) Let the double ordinate PNP' of the (S) π – 1<br />

2<br />

x y<br />

hyperbola – = 1 is<br />

2<br />

( π –1) ( π –1)<br />

preduced both side to meet<br />

asymptotes in Q and Q'. The<br />

product PQ. PQ' is equal to<br />

2<br />

(T) (π–1) 2<br />

14.<br />

Column-I<br />

Column-II<br />

(A) The distance of the point (1, – 2, 3) (P) 1<br />

from the plane x – y + z = 5<br />

measured parallel to the line<br />

1 1 ⎛ 1 ⎞<br />

x = y = ⎜ – ⎟⎠ z is<br />

2 3 ⎝ 6<br />

(B) The shortest distance between<br />

the lines<br />

and<br />

x – 2<br />

3<br />

x –1<br />

2<br />

=<br />

=<br />

y – 4<br />

4<br />

y – 2<br />

3<br />

=<br />

=<br />

x – 5<br />

5<br />

z – 3<br />

4<br />

is<br />

(Q)<br />

(C) The points (0, –1, –1), (4, 5, 1), (R) 4<br />

(3, 9, 4) and (–4, 4, k) are coplanar<br />

then k =<br />

1<br />

6<br />

(D) The radius of the circular section (S) 3<br />

of the sphere | → r | = 5 by the plane<br />

→<br />

r . ( ^i + ^j + ^k ) = 3 3 is<br />

(T) 2<br />

This section contains 5 questions (Q.15 to 19).<br />

+3 marks will be given <strong>for</strong> each correct answer and no<br />

negative marking. The answer to each of the questions<br />

is a SINGLE-DIGIT INTEGER, ranging from 0 to 9.<br />

The appropriate bubbles below the respective question<br />

numbers in the OMR has to be darkened. For example,<br />

if the correct answers to question numbers X, Y, Z and<br />

W (say) are 6, 0, 9 and 2, respectively, then the correct<br />

darkening of bubbles will look like the following :<br />

X Y Z W<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

15. Two circle of radii 'a' and 'b' touching externally are<br />

2<br />

inscribed in area bounded by y = 1 – x and<br />

x-axis. If b = 2<br />

1 and a = k<br />

1 , then k is ...............<br />

16. If a circle S (x, y) = 0 touches at the point (2, 3) of<br />

the line x + y = 5 and S (1, 2) = 0, then 2 × radius<br />

of such circle is.<br />

17. Consider two concentric circles C 1 : x 2 + y 2 = 1,<br />

C 2 : x 2 + y 2 = 4. Tangents are drawn to C 1 from any<br />

point P on C 2 . These tangents again meet circle C 2 at<br />

A & B. It can be proved that locus of point of<br />

intersection of tangents drawn to C 2 at A and B is a<br />

circle, what is the radius of that circle.<br />

18. In a regular tetrahedron let θ be the angle between<br />

any edge and a face not containing the edge.<br />

If cos 2 a<br />

θ = where a, b ∈ I + also a and b are<br />

b<br />

coprime, then find the value of 13<br />

5 (10a + b)<br />

19. Let A (1, 2), B (3, 4) be two point and C (x,y) be a<br />

point such that (x – 1) (x – 3) + (y – 2) (y – 4) = 0. If<br />

area of ∆ABC is 1 sq, unit. Then maximum number<br />

of positions of C in xy plane is.<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 65<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> Test Series<br />

ANSWER KEY<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>- <strong>JEE</strong> 2011 (July issue)<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans C A B D C D A C B D A B<br />

Column 13 A → P, Q, R, S B → P, Q, R, S C → R, S D → R, S<br />

Match 14 A → R B → P C → Q D → P, S<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 8 5 1 4 2<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans C B C A A D D B D D B A<br />

Column 13 A → P, R B → P, R C → Q, T D → S<br />

Match 14 A → P, S, T B → R, S C → Q D → P<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 4 2 6 4 5<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans A D D C B D C B A C B D<br />

Column 13 A → Q, R, S B → P C → S D → P, R, T<br />

Match 14 A → R B → P C → S D → Q<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 2 4 5 3 0<br />

<strong>IIT</strong>- <strong>JEE</strong> 2012 (July issue)<br />

PHYSICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans D C B B A A C D D B A C<br />

Column 13 A → P, R B → Q, S C → Q, R D → P, S<br />

Match 14 A → R B → P C → S D → Q<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 2 3 7 5 7<br />

CHEMISTRY<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans B B D D D A A C A A C D<br />

Column 13 A → Q B → P, R C → P, S D → P, S<br />

Match 14 A → Q B → S C → P D → R<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 8 4 5 2 4<br />

MATHEMATICS<br />

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

Ans B A B B B C B A B A A A<br />

Column 13 A → Q B → R C → P D → S<br />

Match 14 A → P B → Q C → R D → R<br />

Numerical Ques 15 16 17 18 19<br />

Response Ans 4 1 4 5 4<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 66<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Subscription Offer <strong>for</strong> Students<br />

'<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> becoming more competitive examination day by day.<br />

Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.<br />

C<br />

"<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the <strong>for</strong>efront.<br />

Every month get the <strong>XtraEdge</strong> Advantage at your door step.<br />

✓ Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>.<br />

✓ Predict future paper trends with <strong>XtraEdge</strong> Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.<br />

✓ Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills<br />

✓ Stay in<strong>for</strong>med about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more<br />

XtraFunda.<br />

✓ Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of <strong>IIT</strong>ians<br />

✓ Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/Contests problems and Challenging Questions.<br />

SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR “EXTRAEDGE FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> ”<br />

The Manager-Subscription,<br />

“<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>”<br />

<strong>Career</strong> <strong>Point</strong> Infosystems Ltd,<br />

4 th Floor, CP-Tower,<br />

IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005<br />

Special<br />

Offer<br />

I wish to subscribe <strong>for</strong> the monthly Magazine “<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>”<br />

Half Yearly Subscription (Rs. 100/-) One Year subscription (Rs. 200/-) Two year Subscription (Rs. 400/-)<br />

I am paying R. …………………….through<br />

Money Order (M.O)<br />

Bank Demand Draft of No………………………..Bank………………………………………………………..Dated<br />

(Note: Demand Draft should be in favour of "<strong>Career</strong> <strong>Point</strong> Infosystems Ltd" payable at Kota.)<br />

C<br />

Name:<br />

Father's Name:<br />

Address:<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________<br />

________________________City_____________________________State__________________________<br />

PIN_________________________________________Ph with STD Code __________________________<br />

Class Studying in ________________E-Mail: ________________________________________________<br />

From months: ____________________to ________________________________________________<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 67<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


Subscription Offer <strong>for</strong> Schools<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong><br />

<strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong> becoming more competitive examination day by day.<br />

Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.<br />

C<br />

"<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the <strong>for</strong>efront.<br />

Every month get the <strong>XtraEdge</strong> Advantage at your door step.<br />

✓ Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of the <strong>IIT</strong> <strong>JEE</strong>.<br />

✓ Predict future paper trends with <strong>XtraEdge</strong> Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.<br />

✓ Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills<br />

✓ Stay in<strong>for</strong>med about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more<br />

XtraFunda.<br />

✓ Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of <strong>IIT</strong>ians<br />

✓ Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/ Contests problems and Challenging Questions.<br />

FREE SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR “EXTRAEDGE FOR <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> ”<br />

The Manager-Subscription,<br />

“<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>”<br />

<strong>Career</strong> <strong>Point</strong> Infosystems Ltd,<br />

4 th Floor, CP-Tower,<br />

IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005<br />

C<br />

We wish to subscribe <strong>for</strong> the monthly Magazine “<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong>”<br />

Half Yearly Subscription One Year subscription Two year Subscription<br />

Institution Detail:<br />

Graduate Collage Senior Secondary School Higher Secondary School<br />

Name of the Institute:<br />

Name of the Principal:<br />

Mailing Address:<br />

Board/ University:<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________<br />

__________________City_________________________State__________________________<br />

PIN_____________________Ph with STD Code_____________________________________<br />

Fax_______________________________ E-Mail_____________________________________<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________<br />

School Seal with Signature<br />

<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 68<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 69<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>


<strong>XtraEdge</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>IIT</strong>-<strong>JEE</strong> 70<br />

<strong>JULY</strong> <strong>2010</strong>

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!